21-25 After CPEC

SETHU INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
(An Autonomous Institution | Accredited with ‘A++’ Grade by NAAC)
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
B.E. ECE accredited by NBA, New Delhi under Washington Accord (Tier-I)
REGULATION – 2021
BATCH 2021 - 2025
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM & SYLLABUS
Chairperson Chairman
Board of Studies Academic Council
SETHU INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
Pulloor, Kariapatti – 626115
(An Autonomous Institution)
B.E. Degree Programme CURRICULUM
Regulation 2021 (Revised)
Bachelor of Engineering in Electronics and Communication Engineering
OVERALL COURSE STRUCTURE
Total No. Credit

S.No Course Category Credits
of Courses Percentage
1 Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) 6 9 5.5%
2 Basic Science courses (BS) 10 28 17.3%
3 Engineering Science courses (ES) 9 24 14.9%
4 Professional Core courses (PC) 22 56 34.7%
5 Professional Elective (PE) 6 18 11.1%
6 Open Elective (OE) 4 12 7.4%
7 Project work (PW) 3 13 8.0%
8 Mandatory Courses (MC) 9 1 0.6%
9 Internship (MC) 1 1 0.3%
TOTAL 70 162 100 %
SEMESTER - WISE COURSE STRUCTURE – NUMBER OF

COURSES
Semester HS BS ES PC PE OE P MC TOTAL
I 1 4 4 - - - - 1 10
II 1 3 1 1 - - - 1 7
III - 1 1 6 - - - 1 9
IV 1 1 1 5 - - - 1 9
V 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 11
VI 1 - 1 3 2 1 1 1 10
VII 1 - - 2 2 1 3 9
VIII - - - 1 1 1 1 4
TOTAL 6 10 9 22 6 4 3 9 70
SEMESTER - WISE COURSE STRUCTURE – CREDITS
Semester HS BS ES PC PE OE P MC TOTAL
I 2 11 9 - - - - - 22
II 1.5 8 3 3.5 - - - - 16
III - 4 3 15 - - - - 22
IV 1.5 4 3 14.5 - - - - 23
V - 1 3 12 3 3 1 1 24
VI 1 - 3 7 6 3 4 - 24
VII 3 - - 4 6 3 - - 17
VIII - - - - 3 3 8 - 14
TOTAL 9 28 24 56 18 12 13 1 162
SEMESTER I
S. Course Course
Course Title L T P C
Code Category
No.
Theory Courses
English for Technical Communication

1. 21UEN101 HSS 2 0 0 2
(Common to ALL Branches– Except CSBS)
Matrix and Calculus
2. 21UMA102 BS 3 1 0 4
(Common to ALL Branches – Except CSBS)
Engineering Physics
3. 21UPH103 BS 3 0 0 3
Applied Chemistry
4. 21UCY105 (Common to ECE, EEE, CSE, IT, BME, BT, BS 3 0 0 3
CSD, AIDS )
Problem Solving and Python Programming
5. 21UCS108 ES 3 0 0 3
(Common to ALL Branches except CSBS)
Engineering Graphics
6. 21UME109 ES 3 1 0 4
(Common to ALL Branches)
Laboratory Courses

7. 21UCS110 ES 0 0 2 1
Laboratory(Common to ALL Branches)
Engineering Fundamentals Laboratory
8. 21UCS112 ES 0 0 2 1
(Common to ECE, CSE, IT, BME & BT)
Basic Sciences Laboratory – I
9. 21UGS113 BS 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
Induction Programme
10. 21UGM131 MC 0 3 0 P/F
Total 17 5 6 22
Total Credits : 22
SEMESTER II
S. Course Course
Code Course Title Category L T P C
No.
Theory Courses
Communication Skills for Professionals

1. 21UEN201 (Integrated Course) HSS 1 0 1 1.5
(Common to ALL Branches, Except CSBS)
Calculus, Complex Analysis and Numerical
2. 21UMA204 Methods (Only for ECE) BS 3 1 0 4
3. 21UPH208 Electromagnetic Theory(Only for ECE) BS 3 0 0 3
Basic Electrical and Instrumentation

4. 21UEC204 Engineering ES 3 0 0 3
Electronic Devices (Integrated Course)

5. 21UEC205 PC 2 0 3 3.5
Laboratory Course
Basic Sciences Laboratory – II

6. 21UGS210 (Common to ALL Branches – Except BS 0 0 2 1
CSBS)
Mandatory Course
7. Environmental Science MC 2 0 0 P/F

21UGM231
(Common to all branches except BME, BT)
Total 15 1 6 16
Total Credits : 16
SEMESTER III
S. Course Course
No. Code Category
Theory Courses
Numerical Analysis and Linear

1. 21UMA323 BS 3 1 0 4
Algebra (Only for ECE)
2. 21UEC302 Digital Electronics and Design PC 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC303 Circuit Theory PC 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC304 Signals and Systems PC 3 1 0 4
5. 21UEC305 Electronic Circuits PC 3 0 0 3
Fundamentals of C Programming 3
6. 21UIT326 ES 2 0 2
(Integrated Course)
Laboratory Courses
7. 21UEC306 Digital Electronics Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
8. 21UEC307 Electronic Circuits Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
Biology for Engineers

9. 21UGM331 (Common to all branches-Except MC 2 0 0 P/F
BME)
Total 19 2 6 22
Total Credits : 22
SEMESTER IV
S. Course Course
Code Category
No.
Theory Courses
Probability, Statistics and Mathematical

1. 21UMA422 BS 3 1 0 4
Structures (Only for ECE)
Electromagnetic Fields and
2. 21UEC402 PC 3 1 0 4
Transmission Lines
3. 21UEC403 Data Communication and Networks PC 3 0 0 3
Linear Integrated Circuits

4. 21UEC404 PC 2 0 3 3.5
(Integrated Course)
5. 21UEC405 Analog and Digital Communication PC 3 0 0 3
Introduction to data structures and

6. 21UIT429 algorithms (Integrated Course) ES 2 0 2 3
Laboratory Courses
Interpersonal Skills & Team building

7. 21UGS433 HSS 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory (Only for ECE)
Analog and Digital Communication
8. 21UEC406 Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
9. 21UGM431 Gender Equality MC 1 0 0 P/F

Total 17 2 9 23
Total Credits : 23
SEMESTER V
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. 21UEC501 Digital Signal Processing PC 3 1 0 4
Microprocessors, Microcontrollers
2. 21UEC502 and Applications PC 3 0 0 3
Internet of Things and Applications

3. 21UEC503 (Integrated Course) ES 2 0 2 3
4. 21UEC504 Antenna and Wave Propagation PC 3 0 0 3
5. PE – I Professional Elective – I PE 3 0 0 3
6. OE – I Open Elective – I OE 3 0 0 3
Reasoning and Aptitude (common

7. 21UGS531 to CSE, ECE, CSBS, AIDS, CSD BS 1 0 0 1
& AIML)
Laboratory Courses
Microprocessors, Microcontrollers and

8. 21UEC505 Applications Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
9. 21UEC506 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
10. 21UEC507 Creative Thinking and Innovation PW 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
11. 21UGT140 Heritage of Tamils MC 1 0 0 1
Total 19 1 8 24
Total Credits : 24
SEMESTER VI
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. 21UEC601 Wireless Communication PC 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC602 VLSI Design PC 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC603 Image Processing and Analysis ES 3 0 0 3
4. PE - II Professional Elective – II PE 3 0 0 3
5. PE - III Professional Elective – III PE 3 0 0 3
6. OE - II Open Elective – II OE 3 0 0 3
Laboratory Courses
7. 21UEC607 Product Development Project PW 0 0 8 4
8. 21UEC608 VLSI Design Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
Soft skills and Communication Laboratory

9. 21UGS632 (common to ECE, Mechanical, Civil, HSS 0 0 2 1
BME, BT)
Mandatory Course
Indian Constitution (Common to ALL

10. 21UGM631 MC 1 0 0 P/F
Branches)
Total 19 0 12 24
Total Credits : 24
SEMESTER VII
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. 21UME701 Project Management and Finance HS 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC702 Optical and Microwave Communication PC 3 0 0 3
3. PE - IV Professional Elective – IV PE 3 0 0 3
4. PE - V Professional Elective – V PE 3 0 0 3
5. OE - III Open Elective – III OE 3 0 0 3
Laboratory Courses
Optical and Microwave Communication
Mandatory Course
7. 21UGM731 Sports and Social Development MC - - - P/F
8. 21UGM732 Skill Development MC - - - P/F
9 21UEC735 Internship MC - - - 1
Total 15 0 2 17
Total Credits : 17
SEMESTER VIII
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. PE - VI Professional Elective – VI PE 3 0 0 3
2. OE - IV Open Elective – IV OE 3 0 0 3
Laboratory Courses
3. 21UEC801 Project work P 0 0 16 8
Mandatory Course
Professional Ethics and Human Values
4. 21UGM831 MC 2 0 0 P/F
Total 8 0 16 14
Total Credits : 14
LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
S. Course
Code Course Title L T P C
No.
Vertical I – 21ECV100-Signal Processing
1. 21ECV101 Adaptive Signal processing and Applications 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV102 Speech and Audio Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV103 Video Processing and Analysis 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV104 Bio Medical Signal & Image Processing 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV105 DSP Processor Architecture 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV106 Software Defined and Cognitive Radio 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV107 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV1N01 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3
Vertical II – 21ECV200-High Speed Communications
1. 21ECV201 Advanced wireless Techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV202 Advanced Communication Network Security 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV203 High Performance Networks 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV204 MIMO System Modeling 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV205 Fiber optic Communication & networks 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV206 Ultra-wide band Communication Networks 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV207 5G Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV2N02 Introduction to Cyber Security 3 0 0 3
Vertical III – 21ECV300-Sensor Technologies and IoT
1. 21ECV301 Advanced Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV302 MEMS and NEMS 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV303 Nano Electronics 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV304 IoT Ecosystem 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV305 IoT Networks and Protocols 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV3N03 Industrial IoT 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV307 Smart Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV308 Block Chain Technology 3 0 0 3

Vertical IV – 21ECV400-Space Technologies
1. 21ECV401 Global Positioning and Navigation System 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV402 Remote Sensing and Information Systems 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV403 Navigation and Communication System 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV404 Satellite Communication and services 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV405 Avionics Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV406 Radar Signal Processing Technology 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV4N04 Rocketry and Space Mechanics 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV408 Design of UAV systems 3 0 0 3
Vertical V – 21ECV500 - Semiconductor Chip Design and Testing
1. 21ECV501 Device Modeling 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV502 Validation and Testing Technology 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV503 Low Power VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV504 VLSI Design and Testing 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV505 Mixed Signal Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV506 Analog CMOS Circuit Design 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV507 Microelectronics and VLSI Design Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV5N05 ASIC & FPGA based Design 3 0 0 3
Vertical VI – 21ECV600 - Bio Medical Technologies
1. 21ECV601 Wearable Electronics 3 0 0 3
2. 21BMV702 Human Assist Devices 3 0 0 3
3. 21BMV704 Therapeutic Equipment 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV6N06 Healthcare Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV605 Biomedical Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV606 Body Area Networks 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV607 Embedded Systems in Medical Devices 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV608 Tele Medicine 3 0 0 3
Other Electives
1. 21UEC901 Linear Control Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC902 Principles of Robotics 3 0 0 3

3. 21UEC903 Principles of Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC904 Multimedia Compression and Communication 3 0 0 3
5. 21UEC905 ARM System Development 3 0 0 3
6. 21UEC906 AR & VR 3 0 0 3
7. 21UEC907 Cyber security systems 3 0 0 3

GENERAL VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE
S. Course
Code Course Title L T P C
No
Vertical – 21CBVG00-Fintech and Block Chain
1. 21CBVG01 Financial Management 3 0 0 3
2. 21CBVG02 Fundamentals of Investment 3 0 0 3
3. 21CBVG03 Banking, Financial Services and Insurance 3 0 0 3
4. 21CBVG04 Introduction to Blockchain and its Applications 3 0 0 3
5. 21CBVG05 Fintech Personal Finance and Payments 3 0 0 3
6. 21CBVG06 Introduction to Fintech 3 0 0 3
Vertical – 21MEVG00- Entrepreneurship
1. 21MEVG01 Foundations of Entrepreneurship 3 0 0 3
2. 21MEVG02 Team Building & Leadership Management for Business 3 0 0 3
3. 21MEVG03 Creativity & Innovation in Entrepreneurship 3 0 0 3
4. 21MEVG04 Principles of Marketing Management for Business 3 0 0 3
5. 21MEVG05 Human Resource Management for Entrepreneurship 3 0 0 3
6. 21MEVG06 Financing New Business Ventures 3 0 0 3
Vertical – 21EEVG00- Public Administration
1. 21EEVG01 Principles of Public Administration 3 0 0 3
2. 21EEVG02 Indian Economics 3 0 0 3
3. 21EEVG03 Public Personnel Administration 3 0 0 3
4. 21EEVG04 Administrative Theories 3 0 0 3
5. 21EEVG05 Indian Administrative System 3 0 0 3
6. 21EEVG06 Public Policy Administration 3 0 0 3
Vertical – 21CSVG00- Business Data Analytics
1. 21CSVG01 Statistics for Management 3 0 0 3
2. 21CSVG02 Data mining for Business Intelligence 3 0 0 3
3. 21CSVG03 Human Resource Analytics 3 0 0 3
4. 21CSVG04 Web and Social Media Analytics for Marketing 3 0 0 3
5. 21CSVG05 Operation and Supply Chain Analytics 3 0 0 3

6. 21CSVG06 Financial Analytics 3 0 0 3
Vertical – 21CEVG00- Environment and Sustainability
1. 21CEVG01 Sustainable infrastructure Development 3 0 0 3
2. 21CEVG02 Sustainable Agriculture and Environmental Management 3 0 0 3
3. 21CEVG03 Sustainable Bio Materials 3 0 0 3
4. 21CEVG04 Materials for Energy Sustainability 3 0 0 3
5. 21CEVG05 Green Technology 3 0 0 3
6. 21CEVG06 Environmental Quality Monitoring and Analysis 3 0 0 3
7. 21CEVG07 Integrated Energy Planning for Sustainable Development 3 0 0 3

Energy Efficiency for Sustainable
8. 21CEVG08 3 0 0 3
Development
OPEN ELECTIVES FOR THE ECE STUDENTS
S.No COURSE CODE COURSE NAME DEPT OFFERED

1 21UME971 Introduction to Industry 4.0 MECH
2 21UME972 Product Life Cycle Management MECH
3 21UEE971 Drone Technologies EEE
4 21UEE972 Renewable Energy Technology EEE
5 21UCE971 Developments of Smart Cities CIVIL
6 21UCE972 Remote Sensing and GIS Application CIVIL
7 21UAG971 ICT in Agriculture AGRI
8 21UAG972 Integrated Farming System AGRI
9 21UCH971 Fire safety Engineering Chemical
10 21UBT971 Bio nanotechnology BTECH
11 21UBT972 Herbal Medicines BTECH
12 21UFR973 French For Engineers ENGLISH
13 21UJN975 Japanese For Engineers ENGLISH
14 21UEN972 Speak Better,Write Better ENGLISH
OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES OFFERED FOR OTHER PROGRAMMES
Course
S.No. Code Course Title L T P C
1. 21UEC971 Design thinking for Innovations 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC972 IoT Concepts and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC973 Sensors 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC974 Fundamentals of VLSI Design 3 0 0 3
5. 21UEC975 Wearable Devices 3 0 0 3
6. 21UEC976 Basics of Communication Systems 3 0 0 3
7. 21UEC977 Automotive Electronics 3 0 0 3

LIST OF INDUSTRY DESIGNED/VALUE ADDED COURSES
Course
S. No. Course Title L T P C
Code
1. 21UEC861 PIC Embedded Programming 2 0 0 1
2. 21UEC862 PCB Design 2 0 0 1
3. 21UEC863 Python Programming 2 0 0 1
4. 21UEC864 Data Science for ECE 2 0 0 1
5. 21UEC865 Trouble Shooting in Smart phones 2 0 0 1
6. 21UEC866 Arduino Programming 2 0 0 1
7. 21UEC867 Android Programming 2 0 0 1
8. 21UEC868 Introduction to Java Programming 2 0 0 1
9.. 21UEC869 Programming in C++ 2 0 0 1
10. 21VEC01 CCNA Networking Value added Course
11. 21VEC02 Programming in C Value added Course
12. 21VEC03 Java Programming for ECE Value added Course
COURSE OFFERED TO OTHER PROGRAMMES
S. Course Departmen
Code Course Title t L T P C
No.
1. 21UEC225 Principles of Electronics Engineering CSBS 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC226 Electronics Engineering Laboratory CSBS 0 0 2 1
3. 21UEC425 Microprocessor and Microcontrollers CSE 3 0 0 3

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
4. 21UEC426 CSE 0 0 2 1
Laboratory
5. 21ECV102 Speech and Audio Signal Processing BME 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV107 Machine Vision BME 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER I
SEMESTER I
S. Course Course
Code Category
No.
Theory Courses
English for Technical Communication

1. 21UEN101 HSS 2 0 0 2
Matrix and Calculus
2. 21UMA102 BS 3 1 0 4
Engineering Physics
3. 21UPH103 BS 3 0 0 3
Applied Chemistry
4. 21UCY105 (Common to ECE, EEE, CSE, IT, BME, BT, BS 3 0 0 3
CSD, AIDS)
5. 21UCS108 ES 3 0 0 3
(Common to ALL Branches except CSBS)
Engineering Graphics
6. 21UME109 ES 3 1 0 4
Laboratory Courses

7. 21UCS110 ES 0 0 2 1
Laboratory(Common to ALL Branches)
Engineering Fundamentals Laboratory
8. 21UCS112 ES 0 0 2 1
(Common to ECE, CSE, IT, BME & BT)
Basic Sciences Laboratory – I
9. 21UGS113 BS 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
Induction Programme
10. 21UGM131 MC 0 3 0 P/F
Total 17 5 6 22
Total Credits : 22
ENGLISH FOR TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
21UEN101 (Common to All Branches except CSBS) 2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To enhance the vocabulary of students
 To strengthen the application of functional grammar and basic skills
 To improve the language proficiency of students
Unit – 1 8
Listening –Formal and informal conversations and comprehension. Speaking- introducing oneself –
exchanging personal and social information-Reading – Skimming and Scanning. Writing– Sentence
Formation, Formal Letters (Permission/Requisition) - Grammar - Parts of Speech - Tense -
Vocabulary Development – Technical Word Formation- Prefix- suffix - Synonyms and
Antonyms-Phrases and Clauses.
Unit – 2 8
Listening– Telephonic Conversations. Speaking– Pronunciation rules with Stress pattern. Reading –
comprehension-pre-reading, post-reading- comprehension questions Writing – Punctuation rules,
paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short narrative descriptions, Precise writing,
Developing Hints - Report Writing (Industrial, Accident)- Grammar – Voice Vocabulary Development-
Words from other languages in English.
Unit – 3 7
Listening – Motivational speech by Great Speakers Speaking–Narrating daily events - retelling short
stories. Reading – Newspaper reading. Writing – Job application letter - Transformation of Information
(Transcoding)–Grammar Subject-Verb Agreement (Concord),–– Vocabulary Development –Same
word in different parts of speech
Unit – 4 7
Listening – Understating the instruction. Speaking-Intonation and preparing dialogue on various formal and
informal situation Reading –Note Making from given text - Writing– Creating coherence, Essay writing with
proper introduction and conclusion, Giving Instruction (Guidance/Procedure) - Grammar–Spot the Errors
in English, Vocabulary Development– One word substitution.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Apply grammar effectively in writing meaningful sentences and paragraphs. Apply
CO2 Exhibit reading skills and comprehension to express the ideas in the given text. Understand
CO3 Develop writing skills to present the ideas in various formal situations. Create
CO4 Develop oral fluency to express the ideas in various formal situations. Create
CO5 Exhibit writing skills to prepare reports for various purposes. Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. KN Shoba, Lourdes Joavani Rayen, Communicative English, New Delhi, Cambridge University
Press, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Meenakshi, Sangeetha Sharma, Business Communication, New Delhi, Oxford
University Press, 2014.
2. Lakshminarayanan. K.R,English for Technical Communication, Chennai, Scitech
Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd, 2004.
3. Rizvi. Asraf M, Effective Technical Communication, New Delhi, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 2007.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO 6 3 1 1 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3 2.5 1 1 1 2 2
L T P C
21UMA102 MATRIX AND CALCULUS 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students capable of identifying linear equations based problems (Eigen
Value) from practical areas and obtain the Eigen value oriented solutions in certain
cases.
 To widen the students’ knowledge base on linear algebra, growth rate computation and
application of integrals.
 Able to integrating various types of functions using various integration methods.
 To familiarize the students with the basic rules of differentiation and use them to find
derivatives of products and quotients of functions
 To apply these mathematical concepts (matrix theory, differentiation and
integration) in engineering field.
UNIT 1 MATRICES 8+3

Eigen value and eigenvector of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties – Cayley-
Hamilton theorem (excluding Proof) – Orthogonal reduction – (transformation of a symmetric
matrix to diagonal form) – Quadratic form – Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by
orthogonal transformation
UNIT 2 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 8+3
Introduction – Definition of derivatives – Limits and Continuity – Differentiation techniques
(Product rule, Quotient rule, Chain rule) – Successive differentiation (nth derivatives) – Leibnitz
theorem (without proof) – Maclaurin‗s series – Physical Applications (Newton‗s law of
cooling– Heat flow problems, Rate of decay of radioactive materials – Chemical reactions and
solutions, Ohm‗s law, Kirchoff‗s law – Simple electric circuit problems)
UNIT 3 FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 8+3
Partial derivatives – Euler‗s theorem for homogenous functions – Total derivatives –
Differentiation of implicit functions – Jacobian – Taylor‗s expansion – Maxima and Minima
– Method of Lagrangian Multipliers
UNIT 4 INTEGRAL CALCULUS 8+3
Definitions and concepts of integrals – Methods of integration (Decomposition method,
Substitution method, Integration by parts) – Definite integrals – Properties and problems –
Reduction formulae – Beta and Gamma functions.
UNIT 5 MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 8+3
Doubleintegration–CartesianandPolarcoordinates–Changeoforderofintegration–Areaas a double
integral - Change of variables between Cartesian and Polar coordinates – Triple integration in
Cartesian coordinates–Volume as triple integral.
SUPPLEMENT TOPIC (for internal evaluation only) 3
Evocation /Application of Mathematics, Quick Mathematics – Speed Multiplication and Division
Applications of Matrices.
TOTAL : 45 (L) + 15 (T) = 60
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply the Characteristic Equation, Characteristic roots and Apply

use the applicability of Cayley – Hamilton theorem to find the
Inverse of matrix.
Analyze functions using limits, continuity, derivatives and to solve
CO2 Analyze
Physical application problems
CO3 Apply differentiation techniques and Lagrange multiplier method
to predict the extreme values of the functions with constrain Apply
CO4 Apply the concept of some special function like Gamma,

Beta function and their relation to evaluate some definite integral Apply
CO5 Apply integration to compute Multiple integrals, Area and

Volume in addition to change of order and change of variables Apply
CO6 Understand the basic concept in Matrix, Differentiation and

Integration Understand
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bali n. P and manishgoyal, a text book of engineering mathematics‖, laxmi
publications (p) ltd, new Delhi, 8th edition,(2011).
2. Veerarajan.t―engineeringmathematics‖tatamcgrawhillpublishingcompany,new Del
hi, 2008.
3. Grewal. B.s, ―higher engineering mathematics‖, khanna publications, new Delhi, 42nd
edition,(2012).
REFERENCES:
1. Ramanab.v, ―higher engineering mathematics‖, Tata mcgraw hill publishing
company, new Delhi, 11th reprint,(2010).
2. Glynjames,―advanced engineering mathematics‖,Pearson education,new Delhi, 7th
edition,(2007).
3. Jainr.kandiyengars.r.k,advanced engineering mathematics‖,narosa publishing house, new
delhi, 3rd edition, (2007).
4. Bharati krishnatirthaji, ―vedic mathematics -
mental
calculation‖, motilal banarsi dass publications, new delhi, 1st
edition,(1965).
5. Kreyszig. E, ―advanced engineering mathematics‖, john wiley& sons, New York, 10th
edition,(2011).
6. P.sivaramakrishnadas,e.rukmangada chari―engineering
mathematics‖,volume1, Pearson Edison new Delhi, 2nd edition,(2013).
CO/PO/PSO MAPPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO 3 3 1 2
CO 4 3 1 2
CO 5 3 1 2
CO 6 3 1 2
CAM
3 3 1 1 2.00
(Avg)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
21UPH103
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the research interest in crystal physics
 To use the principles of Lasers and its types
 To apply principles of Quantum physics in engineering field
 To develop knowledge on properties of materials
UNIT 1 CRYSTAL STRUCTURE 9
Introduction – Classification of solids –Space lattice –Basis-Lattice parameter – Unit cell – Crystal
system –Miller indices –d-spacing in cubic lattice - Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell –
Atomic radius-Coordination number – Packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures -
Applications.
UNIT 2 SOLID DEFECTS AND HOLOGRAPHY 9
Introduction – Solid defects - Crystal imperfection –Point defects-Line defects-Surface defects-
Volume defects Burger vector –Holography–Construction and Reconstruction of hologram –
Industrial and Medical Applications
UNIT 3 PHOTONICS 9
Introduction- Principles of Laser- Characteristics of laser -Spontaneous and stimulated emission –
Population inversion – Einstein‘s A and B coefficients - Pumping methods – Basic components of
Laser- Types of lasers – Nd -YAG laser - CO2 laser –Holography –Construction
and Reconstruction of hologram – Industrial and Medical Applications.
UNIT 4 QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
Introduction - Black body radiation – Planck‗s law of radiation - Wien‗s displacement law- Rayleigh
Jeans law- – Compton Effect – Theory and experimental verification – Matter waves- Schrodinger‗s
wave equation – Time dependent – Time independent equation – Particle in 1-D dimensional box
UNIT 5 PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 9

Introduction - Elasticity- Stress and Strain - Hooke's law – Three moduli of elasticity –stress-
strain curve – Poisson's ratio –Factors affecting elasticity –Bending moment – Depression of a
cantilever –Young's modulus by uniform bending –I- shaped girders.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Classify the types of crystals, lasers and elastic behavior of solids Understand
Apply the basic knowledge of crystal, quantum mechanics and
CO2 Apply
mechanical behavior of solids to solve engineering problems
Apply the principle of laser to estimate the wavelength of emitted
CO3 Apply
photons.
Analyze the dual nature of matter using the concepts of quantum
CO4 mechanics Analyze
Analyze the structural and optical properties of crystals in industrial and
CO5 medical applications Analyze
Analyze the structural and optical properties of materials forspecific
CO6 Engineering Applications. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dr.Mani.P, Engineering Physic,Dhanam Publications,Edition,2018,Chennai.
2. Rajendran.V,Engineering,Physic,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
limited, New Delhi,Revised Edition2018.
3. Palanisami P.K.,―Physics For Engineers‖,Scitech Publications(India),PvtLtd.,
Chennai,2018.
REFERENCES:
1. RaghuvenshiG.S.,―Engineering Physics,PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, Revised
Edition2018.
2. Aruldoss.G.,―Engineering Physics,PHI Learning Limited, New Delhi, Revised Edition 2018.
3. Marikani.A.,―Engineering Physics,PHI Learning Private Limited,New Delhi, Revised
Edition2017.
4. Sankar B.N., andPillai.S.O.,―A Textbook of Engineering Physics, New Age International
Publishers Private Limited, New Delhi, Revised Edition 2017.
5. AvadhanuluM.N.and K shirsagarP.G.,―ATextbook:of Engineering Physics, S.Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi,2018.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 2 3 2 2
CO 5 2 3 2
CO 6 2 3 2 2 2
CAM
2.33 2.6 2 2 2.00
(Avg)
L T P C
21UCY105 APPLIED CHEMISTRY
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on Chemical bonding andtypes.
 To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related
problems and water treatment techniques.
 To explain the importance of smart material and green chemistry.
 To describe the knowledge on energy storage devices
UNIT 1 CHEMICAL BONDING 9
Chemical Bonding: Electronic Configuration– Ionic Bond - Covalent Bond – Metallic bond –
Aufbau principle, Pauli Exclusion principle, Valence bond theory application and its limitations,
Various types of hybridization (sp, sp2,sp3) (C H , C H , CH ) -bond strength and bond energy -
Hydrogen bonding, Vander Waals forces
UNIT 2 WATER AND ITS TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness (Problems) – units – estimation of
hardness of water by EDTA – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – Internal treatment
(phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) – External treatment – Ion
exchange process- zeolite process – desalination of brackish water – Reverse
Osmosis
UNIT 3 SMART MATERIALS 9
Introduction to smart materials and their structure - Organic Light Emitting Diodes – Principles and
applications, Liquid crystals – definition and applications
UNIT 4 GREEN CHEMISTRY 9
Introduction to Green Chemistry, the 12 Principles of Green Chemistry, toxicology and Green
Chemistry, Environmental Issues, Climate and Green Chemistry, Energy and Green Chemistry, e-
waste disposal.
UNIT 5 ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES 9
Batteries, fuel cells and supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell)
Secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2- O2 fuel cell and
application.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic concept of chemistry involved in chemical
CO1 bonding, water treatment methods, smart Understand
materials, e-waste management and energy storage devices.
Apply the knowledge of chemical bonding to identify the types of

CO2 Apply
bonds in molecules.
Analyze the impurities of water to find its hardness and
CO3 remove the hardness causing substances. Analyze
Explain the principles and application of organic light emitting

CO4 diodes, liquid crystals and green chemistry Understand
Apply the knowledge of the basic electrochemical cell

CO5 terminology to differentiate various types of energy storage Apply
devices.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JainP.C.and Monica Jain,―Engineering Chemistry, DhanpatRai Publishing Company (P) Ltd,
New Delhi, 2002.
2. Dr.SunitaRattan,―A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry ‖S.K. Kataria& Sons.,New
Delhi,2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Derek Pletcherand Frank C.Walsh,―Industrial Electro chemistry‖,Chapman and Hall,

New York,1993.
2. PeterGrundler,―Chemical Sensors–An introduction for Scientists and Engineers‖, Springer, New
York,2007
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2
CO 2 2 1
CO 3 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1
CO 5 3 1 1 1
CO 6 2 3
CAM
1.6 3 1.6 1 3 1 1
(Avg)
PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON L T P C
21UCS108
PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the concepts in problem solving for computing
 To familiarize the logical constructs of programming
 To illustrate programming in Python
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9
Definition and basic organization of computers–classification of computers–Software– Types
ofsoftware–typesofprogrammingparadigms-Translators:compilerandinterpreter– Problem
solving tools: Algorithms–Flowchart– Pseudocode
UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON 9
Introduction to python – features of python – modes of working with python. Values and data
types: numbers, Boolean, strings; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment,
precedence of operators, comments – print function- conversion of algorithm in to program –
Solving simple problems involving arithmetic computations and sequential logic to solve
UNIT 3 CONTROL CONSTRUCTS 9

Flow of execution – control structures: conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass – Solving
problems involving decision making and iterations
UNIT 4 FUNCTIONS AND PACKAGES 9
Functions - function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments;
parameters, local and global scope, function composition-Anonymous or Lambda Function,
recursion -packages.
UNIT 5 LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES AND STRINGS 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension - Strings: string slices; immutability, string
functions and methods, string module
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the concepts of Python used to solve the computing Understand
problems
CO2 Apply the knowledge of arithmetic & sequential logic to solve Apply
problems related to mathematical expressions
Apply the concepts of Python to solve computer applied complex Apply
CO3
engineering problems that meet specified needs
CO4 Analyze the suitable control constructs to provide solutions to Analyze
computer applied complex engineering problems
CO5 Formulate problems to provide solutions to computer applied Analyze
complex engineering problems using modularity
CO6 Work individually or in teams and demonstrate the solutions to the Affective Domain
given exercises through presentation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ashok Namdev Kamthane & Amit Ashok Kamthane,―Problem solving and
python programming‖, McGraw Hill Education, 2018(copyright)
2. AnuragGupta&GPBiswas,―PythonProgramming–Problemsolving,packagesand
libraries‖, McGraw Hill Education, 2020(copyright).
.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, ―Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python'',

Revised and expanded Edition, MIT Press,2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin W ayne, Robert Dondero, ―Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-Disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, ―Exploring Python||, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,
2015.4.KennethA.Lambert,―Fundamentals of Python: First Programs, CENGAGE
Learning,2012.
4. Charles Dierbach,―Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition,2013.
5. Paul Gries,Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo,―Practical Programming: An
Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3||, Second edition, Pragmatic
Programmers, LLC,2013.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3
CO 6 2 2
CAM 3 3 2 2
(Avg)
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
21UME109
(Common to all Branches) 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop student's graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
engineering products and expose them to existing national standards related to technical
drawings.
 To impart knowledge in development of surfaces, isometric and perspective projections.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (NOT FOR EXAMINATION) 4
Importance of Graphics in Engineering Applications – Use of Drafting Instruments – BIS Conventions

and Specifications – Size, Layout and Folding of Drawing Sheets – Lettering and Dimensioning-
Introduction to Plane Curves, Projection of Points, Lines and Plane Surfaces
UNIT 1 PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone with axis is parallel, perpendicular and
inclined to one of the plane.
UNIT 2 SECTION OF SOLIDS 10
Section of solids - simple position with cutting plane parallel, perpendicular and inclined to one of the plane
UNIT 3 DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 10

Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids and cylinders and cones-
Development of lateral surfaces of sectioned solids.
UNIT 4 ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS 12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric view - isometric projections of simple solids
and cut solids
UNIT 5 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION 12

Representation of Three Dimensional objects – General principles of orthographic projection- Need for
importance of multiple views and their placement – First angle projection – layout views – layout views –
Developing visualization skills of multiple views (Front, top and side views) from
pictorial views of objects
TOTAL : 45 (L) + 15 (T) = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Draw orthographic projections of basic geometrical entities in various
CO1 positions and translate the Geometric information of engineering objects into Understand
engineering drawings
CO2 Apply the principles of orthographic projections to draw projections of solids Apply
and sections of solids
CO3 Develop lateral surfaces of regular and sectioned solids Apply
Prepare isometric drawings of simple solids from orthographic views Apply
CO4
Apply
CO5 Construct orthographic projection from the given pictorial view
Analyze
CO6 Analyze the projections of various solid models using different resting conditions
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natarajan K.V―A Textbook of Engineering Graphics ‖,Dhanalakshmi Publishers,(2006).
2. Bhatt N.D―Engineering Drawing‖, 46th Edition, Charotar Publishing House,(2003).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
3. Venugopal K., and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New AgeInternational
4. (P) Limited, (2008).
5. Gopalakrishnan K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol.I&II),23rd edition,
SubhasPublications.(2014).
6. Dhananjay A. Jolhe, “Engineering Drawing with an introduction to Auto CAD”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,(2012).
7. Saravanan M, Bensan Raj J, Ganesh Kumar S, “Engineering Graphics”, JBR Trisea
Publishers, Nagarcoil,2020.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 2 1 2
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO 5 3 1 1 1
CO 6 2 3
CAM
1.6 3 1.6 1 3 1 1 2.5
(Avg)
L T P C
21UGM131 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
0 3 0 P/F
OBJECTIVES:
 To rejuvenate the Body and Mind
 To strengthen Attitude and soft skills
 To practice Moral values of life.
UNIT 1 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY 10

Zumba- Bokwa Fitness – Yoga – Mediation – Fine Arts
UNIT 2 CREATIVE ARTS 5
Painting – Class Painting – Wall Painting – Art from waste
UNIT 3 UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES & EMINENT SPEAKERS 5
Ethical values – Ambition and Family Expectation, Gratitude, Competition and Excellence– Belief –
Morality of life – Guest Lecture by Eminent personality
UNIT 4 LITERARY
Elocution - Essay writing Competition - Impromptu Session - Dance and singing competition
UNIT 5 PROFICIENCY MODULES 15
Elocution - Essay writing Competition - Impromptu Session - Dance and singing competition
UNIT 6 INDUSTRIAL & LOCAL VISIT 8

VaigaiDam–Theni-VOC-Port-Tuticorin-MaduraiRadioCity-Madurai-AavinMilk
–Madurai-NSS Activities
UNIT 7 FAMILIARIZATION OF THE DEPARTMENT AND INNOVATION 2
Department Introduction and Purpose of Course-Eminent speakers– Scope and
Feature of the Course - Latest Innovation
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Practice physical activities regularly.
CO2 Implement creativity in drawing and waste material
CO3 Communicate their ideas effectively.
CO4 Identify inputs and outputs of different industry process
CO5 Describe the scope and features of their programme of study
TEXT BOOKS:
Student Induction Programme: A Detailed Guide by AICTE, New Delhi.
21UCS110 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize with programming environment
 To familiarize the implementation of programs in Python.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Problems involve Sequential logic and Decision Making
1. Write a Python program to process the mark processing system (Record has the following
Fields: Name, Reg_no,Mark1,Mark2,Mark3,Mark4,Total,average).Print the student details and
find the total and average mark.
2. Write a Python program to compute the +2 Cut off mark, given the Mathematics, physics and
Chemistry marks. A college has decided to admit he students with a cutoff mark of 180. Decide
whether the student is eligible to get and mission in that college or not.
3. A pizza in a circular shape with 8 inches and which is placed in a square box whose side
length is10inches.Find how much of the box is empty?
4. A person owns an air conditioned sleeper bus with 35 seating capacity that routes between
Chennai to Bangalore. He wishes to calculate whether the bus is running in profit or loss state
based on the following scenario:
- Amount he spent for a day for diesel filling is: Rs.15,000
- Amount he spent for a day for Driver and cleaner beta is: Rs.3,000
- TicketamountforaSinglepersonisRs:950
- If all the seats are filled, what would be the result?
- If only15 seats are filled, what would be the result?
5. Consider the person 'X' has some amount in his hand and the person 'Y' has some amount
in his hand. If they wish to exchange the amount among them, how they can exchange the
amount by using the third party 'Z'.
Problems involve iterations
6. A man is blessed with a duck that can lay golden eggs. First day it lays one egg, in second day it
lays two eggs, in third day it lays three eggs, and it continues to lay eggs in an incremental manner
day by day. Now calculate how many golden eggs that duck lays till 'n'th day.
7. Four People A,B,C,D are sitting in a Circular arrangement. In how many ways their seating can
be arranged.
8. The Greek theater shown at the right has 30 seats in the first row of the center section. Each
row behind the first row gains two additional seats. How many seats are in the 5th row in the
center section?
Problem involve functions and recursive functions
6. Write a program that accepts the lengths of three sides of a triangle as inputs. The program
output should indicate whether or not the triangle is a right triangle. (Recall From the Pythagoras
theorem that in a right triangle, the square of one side equals the
sum of the squares of other two sides)
7. A game has to be made from marbles of five colors, yellow, blue, green, red and Violet where five
marbles has to be kept one upon another. Write a python program using recursion, to find how
many ways these marbles can be arranged.
8. Tower of Hanoi is a mathematical puzzle where we have three rods and n disks. The objective of
the puzzle is to move the entire stack to another rod, obeying the following simple rules: Here is a
high-level outline of how to move a tower from the starting pole, to the goal pole, using an
intermediate pole:
1. Move a tower of height-1 to an intermediate pole, using the final pole.
2. Move the remaining disk to the final pole.
3. Move the tower of height-1 from the intermediate pole to the final pole using
original pole
Problems involve List and Nested List
9. In a class of 50 numbers of students, 6 students are selected for state cricket academy.
Sports faculty of this school has to report to the state cricket academy about the selected
students' physical fitness. Here is one of the physical measures of the selected students';
Height in cm is given for those 6 selected students [153,162,148,167,175,151]. By
implementing functions, do the following operations.
(i) State academy selector has to check whether the given height is
present in the Selected students list or not.
(ii) State academy selector has to order the height of students in an
incremental manner.
(iii) State academy selector has to identify the maximum height fromthe list.
Problems involve Dictionary and Tuples Dictionary
10. AuniversitywishestocreateandmaintainthedetailsofthestudentssuchasRollno, Reg no, Name,
Dept, Batch, Contact_no, Nativity(Indian/NRI) as key value pairs. Do the following operations:
(i) Display the complete student details on giving Rollno as input.
(i) Display the complete student details whose nativity belongs to NRI.
(ii) Display the complete student details whose department is CSE.
Tuples
11. A librarian wishes to maintain books details such as ISBN, Book Name, Author Name, Year
published, Publisher Name. He wishes to retrieve the book details in the following scenario:
(i) Retrieve the complete details of the book on giving ISBN.
(i) Retrieve the details of the book which published after the year2015.
(ii) Retrieve the details of the book whose author name is 'Andrew'.
(iv) Retrieve the details of the book that name of the book is 'Python‗
Problems involve Strings
12. A musical album company has 'n' number of musical albums. The PRO of this
company wishes to do following operations based on some scenarios:
(i) Name of the album starts with 's' or 'S'.
(i) Name of the album which contains 'jay' as substring.
(ii) Check whether the album name presents in the repository or not.
Count number of vowels and consonants in the given album name.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Formulate algorithms for simple problems and translate the algorithms to a

CO1 Apply
working program.
Formulate algorithms and programs for arithmetic computations
CO2 Apply
and sequential logic
CO3 Write iterative programs using control constructs Apply
Develop programs using functions, packages and use recursion to
CO4 Apply
reduce redundancy
Represent data using lists, tuples, dictionaries and manipulate them
CO5 Apply
through a program
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTSHARDWARE LAN

SYSTEM WITH 30 NODES (OR) STANDALONE PCS – 30NOS
SOFTWARE OS – UNIX CLONE (License free Linux) EDITOR –IDLE
CO POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO.1
3
CO.2 3
CO.3 3
CO.4 3
CO.5 3
CO.6 2 2
21UCS112 ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to CSE, ECE, IT & BME Branches) 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize the Hardware components of Computer
 To practice the installation of operating systems and other software.
GROUP A(COMPUTER) 24 Periods
 Demonstrating basic components of a personal computer
 Assembling hardware components of a computer
 Installation of windows and linux operating systems
 Installation of software's both in windows and linux operating system
 Configuring the computer to connect with internet
 PC trouble shooting and maintenance
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL &ELECTRONICS) 21Periods

 Study of electronic components and equipments-
a. Resistor color coding
b. Measurement of AC signal parameter (peak to peak, rms, period,
frequency) using CRO
 Study of logic gates
 Soldering practice – components devices and circuits - using general purpose PCB
 Characteristics of LED
 Interfacing of PIR sensor with microcontroller
 Switch control with microcontroller
 Temperature measurement with microcontroller
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the components of the computer and assemble the hardware

CO1 Apply
components of a computer
Install and uninstall the Operating systems and other software's
CO2 Apply
both in in windows and Linux environment
Demonstrate the basic network settings and make trouble shoot
CO3 Apply
and Maintain the compute
CO4 Demonstrate the function of electronics components Apply
CO5 Develop code for interfacing sensors with microcontroller Apply
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
HARDWARE
LAN SYSTEM WITH 30 NODES (OR) STANDALONE PCS – 30 NOS.
SOFTWARE
OS – UNIX CLONE (License free Linux)
EQUIPMENT
Sl No. Name of the Equipment / Software Quantity

1. Logic Trainer Kit 2
2. CRO And AFO 2
3. Small Multipurpose PCBS 5
4. Soldering Guns 5
5. Multimeters 5
6. DC Ammeter 10
7. DC Voltmeter 10
8. Variable DC Power Supply 5
9. Node MCU Development Board 10
10. PIR Sensor (HC-SR501) 5
11. Temperature Sensor (IM35 or DHT11) 5
12. PC With Windows 7 3
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 5 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 6 3 2 2 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
L T P C
21UGS113 BASIC SCIENCES - I LABORATORY
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY
(Common to All Branches)
OBJECTIVES:
 To create scientific Temper among the students.
 To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and
arrival of conclusions.
 To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students
through experiments
1. Laser–Determination of particle size and wavelength of Laser source.

Using Diode Laser.
2. Ultrasonic Interferometer-Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid.
3. Poiseuille‗s method-Determination of Coefficient of viscosity of liquid.
4. Spectrometer–Determination of dispersive power of a prism.
5. Air Wedge method-Determination of thickness of a thin wire.
6. Uniform bending method–Determination of Youngs modulus of
the given rectangular beam.
• A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the principles of Optics, Laser physics and Mechanics to

CO1 Apply
determine the Engineering properties of
materials
Analyze the given liquid sample to determine the viscosity
CO2 Analyze
and compressibility of the liquid
Apply the principles of spectroscopy to determine the
CO3 Apply
properties using prism
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on basic concepts in applications of chemical analysis
 Train the students to handle various instruments.
 To acquire knowledge on the chemical analysis of various metal ions
1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances–Oxalic acid,

Sodium Carbonate, Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrochloric acid
2. Conductometric Titration of strong acid with strong base
3. Conductometric Titration of Mixture of Acids
4. Estimation of Iron by potentiometry
5. Determination of Strength of given acid using pHmetry
6. Determination of molecular weight of polymer by viscometry
7. Comparison of the electrical conductivity of two samples-conductometric method
8. Estimation of copper in brass by EDTA method
• A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered for every course
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the knowledge of Molarity and Normality to prepare standard
CO1 Apply
solution for chemical analysis.
Analyze the concentration of a given analyte by analytical methods.
CO2 Analyze
Apply the knowledge of electrochemical techniques to study various
CO3 Apply
ions present in the industrial effluents.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 1 1
CO 4 3 1 1 1 1
CO 5 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO 6 3 1 1 1 1 1
CAM
(Avg) 2 3 0.6 0.6 1 0.6 0.6
SEMESTER II
SEMESTER II
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
Communication Skills for Professionals

1. 21UEN201 (Integrated Course) HSS 1 0 1 1.5
(Common to ALL Branches, Except CSBS)
Calculus, Complex Analysis and Numerical
2. 21UMA204 Methods (Only for ECE) BS 3 1 0 4
3. 21UPH208 Electromagnetic Theory(Only for ECE) BS 3 0 0 3
Basic Electrical and Instrumentation

4. 21UEC204 Engineering ES 3 0 0 3
5. 21UEC205 Electronic Devices(Integrated Course) PC 2 0 3 3.5
Laboratory Course
Basic Sciences Laboratory – II

6. 21UGS210 (Common to ALL Branches – Except BS 0 0 2 1
CSBS)
Mandatory Course
7. Environmental Science MC 2 0 0 P/F

21UGM231
(Common to all branches except BME, BT)
Total 15 1 6 16
Total Credits : 16
CO1 Apply Language skills to write and speak effectively Create
L T P C
Select
21UEN201 the right words and sentence
COMMUNICATION to communicate
SKILLS FOR ideas
PROFESSIONALS Create
CO2 1 0 1 1.5
clearly and accurately (INTEGRATED COURSE)
Exhibit good postures and proper attire to present the ideas
CO3 (Common to all branches except CSBS) Create
effectively
CO4 Present the ideas effectively using visual aids.
OBJECTIVES: Create
 Improve their oral expression and thought.
CO5 Communicate with clarity and present the ideas effectively to the Create
 audience
Develop their confidence and ability to speak in Public.
 Develop their capacity for leadership.
REFERENCES:
1. Competent
Project 1 Communication-
SELF INTRODUCTION A Practical
& DELIVERGuide
A to becoming
SPEECH a better speaker, Time: 5 to 7
BEFORE
Toastmasters International, USA.
AUDIENCE minutes
2. Norman Lewis – Word Power Made Easy, Pocket Book Publication,2019.
 To Speak in front of an audience with courage.
 Make your message clear, with supporting material.
 Create a strong opening and conclusion
Project 2 SPEAK ON THE CHOSEN CONTENT Time: 5 to 7

minutes
 Select a general topic and bring out

specific purposes.
 Avoid using notes.
 Use symbolic ideas to develop your ideas.
Project 3 USE EFFECTIVE BODY LANGUAGE & INTONATION Time: 5 to 7

minutes
 Use appropriate osture, gestures, facial expressions and eye contact to express your
ideas.
 Use proper intonation and adequate speech module.
Project 4 PRESENT YOUR TOPIC WITH VISUAL AIDS Time: 5 to 7

minutes
 Persuade your points with suitable illustration, specific facts, examples
 Use suitable visual aids to present your topic with confidence.
Project 5 GRASP THE ATTENTION OF THE AUDIENCE Time: 5 to 7

minutes
 Influence your listeners by adopting holistic viewpoint. Use

emotions, stories, and positive quotes in your speech.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 3 3
CO 2 2 3 3
CO 3 2 3 3
CO 4 2 3 3
CO 5 2 3 3
CO 6 2 3 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.00 3.00 3.00
CALCULUS, COMPLEX ANALYSIS AND L T P C
21UMA204 NUMERICAL METHODS 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding of the basics of vector calculus comprising of
gradient, divergence and curl, and line, surface and volume integrals and the
classical theorems involving them.
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of analytic functions and their interesting properties
which could be exploited in a few engineering areas, and be introduced to the host of conformal
mappings with a few standard examples that have direct application
UNIT 1 SOLUTIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 8+3

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of
parameters – Cauchy‗s and Legendre‗s linear equations – Applications of ODE (Bacterial
growth, Population growth, Decayed problems).
UNIT 2 VECTOR CALCULUS 8+3

Gradient Divergence and Curl – Directional derivative – Irrotational and Solenoidal vector fields
–Vector integration – Green‗s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes‗
theorem (excluding proofs) – Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopiped.
UNIT 3 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 8+3

Functions of a complex variable – Analytic function – Necessary and Sufficient Conditions
(excluding Proofs) – Harmonic function - Properties of an analytic function – Harmonic conjugate –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping-Simple
Transformation: w = z+c, cz, 1/z, and Bilinear transformation.
UNIT 4 COMPLEX INTEGRATION 8+3
Statement and applications of Cauchy‗s integral theorem, Cauchy‗s integral formula and Cauchy
Residue Theorem – Taylor‗s and Laurent‗s expansions – Applications of residue theorem to
evaluate real integrals – Unit circle and semi-circular contour
(excluding Poles on the real axis).
UNIT 5 SOLUTION OF ALGEBRAIC, TRANSCENDENTAL 8+3
EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS
Iteration method – Newton-Raphson method – Gauss Elimination method – Pivoting – Gauss
Jordan methods –iterative methods: Gauss Jacobi method, Gauss Seidel method - Eigen values
of a matrix by Power method– Jacobi‗s method for a real
symmetric matrix
SUPPLEMENT TOPIC (for internal evaluation only)
Evocation / Application of Mathematics, Applications of Matrices.
TOTAL : 45 (L) + 15 (T) = 60 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the knowledge of higher order ordinary differential equations
CO1 in real life engineering problems Apply
Apply the concept vector identities in problem solving and

CO2 evaluate the line, surface and volume integrals Apply
Apply the knowledge of analytic function and conformal mapping

CO3 in various Engineering fields Apply
Apply the knowledge of singularities, residues in complex Apply

CO4 integration
Apply various techniques to solve linear, nonlinear equations and Apply

CO5 Eigen value problems of a Matrix by Numerically
Understand the knowledge of ODE, directional derivatives, scalar Understand

CO6
potentials and poles
TEXT BOOKS:
1. VEERARAJAN.T ―Engineering Mathematics for First year‖ Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi,2008.
2. IYENGAR S.R.K , JAIN R.K. , MAHIDEN KUMAR JAIN ― Numerical Methods for Scientific
and Engineering Computations‖ New Age International Publishers 7th Edition2019.
3. GREWAL. B.S, ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, (2014).
REFERENCES:
1. RAMANA B.V, ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 11th Reprint,(2010).
2. BROWN J.W. and CHURCHIL R.V.‖Complex Variable and Applications‖7th Edition
McGraw Hill Publishing Company2004.
3. JAIN R.K and IYENGAR S.R.K, ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖,
NarosaPublishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition,(2007).
4. INCEE.L―OrdinaryDifferentialEquations―DoverPublications1958.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1 2
CO 2 3 1 2
CO 3 3 1 2
CO 4 3 1 2
CO 5 3 1 2
CO 6 2 1 2
CAM
(Avg) 3.00 1 2.00
L T P C
21UPH208 ELECTRO MAGNETIC THEORY
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To demonstrate the concepts of different coordinate systems,
Maxwell`s equations, static electric and magnetic fields.
 To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of Electromagnetism.
 To enable the students to understand the Nano electronic devices.
UNIT 1 ELECTRON THEORY OF SOLIDS 9
Introduction-Conduction in metals-mobility and conductivity – classical free electron theory of
metals –merits and demerits- Electrical and thermal conductivity (derivation)– Wiedemann–
Franz law–Lorentz number–Quantum Free electron theory—Density of energy states – carrier
concentration in
UNIT 2 ELECTROSTATICS 9
Introduction-Electric dipole- Field lines- Flux- Gauss's law- Electric potential due to continuous
charge distribution, equipotential line/ surface- Poisson's equation and its
solution- Electric displacement vector- Conductors and Capacitors-dielectric permittivity and
susceptibility-Force and torque on a dipole due to external static electric field
UNIT 3 MAGNETOSTATICS 9
Introduction– Bio-Savart law – Properties of magnetic field-Magnetic flux density- Magnetic vector
and scalar potential-Amperes law- magnetic dipole moment- force and torque on a magnetic
dipole due to external static magnetic field-Magnetization -Magnetic susceptibility and permeability-
Dia, Para and ferromagnetism - Boundary conditions - Force on a charged particle under electric
and magnetic fields
UNIT 4 OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials – Optical density - Optical processes in semiconductors: optical
absorption and emission, charge injection and recombination, optical absorption,
loss and gain. Optical processes in quantum wells – Optoelectronic devices: light detectors and
solar cells – light emitting diode – laser diode.
UNIT 5 NANO MATERIALS
Introduction to Nano materials-Various forms of Nano materials-Nano Electronic devices-
Nanowires-Nano sensor-Quantum confinement-quantum structures-Quantum dot laser- Quantum
resistance -Optical properties of Nano materials-Applications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the basic concepts of Conducting, Magnetic, Dielectric and
CO1 Understand
Nano materials
Apply the principles of electrostatics and magneto statics to solve
CO2 engineering problems in communication field. Apply
Apply the concepts of spin and orbital motion of electrons in
CO3 determining the magnetic properties of materials having specific Apply
engineering applications.
Analyze the electrical, magnetic and optical properties of the materials
CO4 for industrial application Analyze
Describe the behavior of elastic and magnetic dipoles to study the
CO5 Apply
energy storage properties of engineering materials
Apply free electron theory, to calculate energy density and carrier
CO6 Apply
concentration in metals
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nano Electronics and Information Technology: Rainer Waser,Wiley-VCH,2018
2. S.O. Kasap. Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2020.
3. Electromagnetic Theory and Applications: A. K. Saxena: second Edition, Alpha science
REFERENCES:
1. Nano-electronics & Nano-systems: From Transistor to Molecular & Quantum Devices: Karl
Goser, Jan Dienstuhl ,Springer 2004 or new Edition
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2
CO 5 2 2 2
CO 6 3 2 2
CAM
2.88 2 2 2
(Avg)
BASIC ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING L T P C
21UEC204
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To explain the methods of biasing of transistors.
 To familiarize the students about the mid band analysis of amplifier circuits using small - signal
equivalent circuits.
 To summarize the method of analyzing large signal and feedback amplifiers.
UNIT 1 A.C CIRCUITS AND TRANSFORMERS 9

Introduction to AC circuits – waveforms and RMS value – power and power factor – Pure R,L and C
alone-series RL, RC and RLC circuits. Transformers-Introduction –principle of working-Types of
transformers-emf equation of a Transformer-Losses in a Transformer- Auto transformer
UNIT 2 AC AND DC MACHINES 9

Single phase Induction motors -Construction– Types–starting and speed control methods,
Synchronous motors- working principle-starting methods -– Torque equation – Stepper Motors.
Introduction – Constructional Features– Motoring and generation principle - Emf and Torque equation
– Circuit Model –– Starting and Speed Control – Universal Motor
UNIT 3 ELECTRO MECHANCIAL INDICATING INSTRUMENTS 9

Suspension Galvanometer, Torque and deflection of the galvanometer, Permanent magnet moving coil
mechanism, DC Ammeter, DC Voltmeter, Voltmeter Sensitivity, Series type Ohm meter, Shunt type
Ohmmeter, Multimeter or VOM
UNIT 4 SIGNAL GENERATORS AND ANALYZERS 9

Signal generators - sine wave generators, Frequency synthesized signal generator, Frequency divider
generator, Signal generator modulation, Sweep Frequency generators, pulse and square wave generators,
Function generator, Audio frequency signal generator, spectrum analyzer.
UNIT 5 OSCILLOSCOPES 9
Cathode ray oscilloscopes - block diagram, Cathode ray tube, CRT circuits, Vertical Deflection system,
Delay line, Multiple trace, Horizontal Deflection system, Oscilloscope probe and transducers, Oscilloscope
technique, Special oscilloscopes- Analog and Digital Storage oscilloscope.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the working principles of electrical circuits and machines.
CO1 Understand
Describe the fundamental concepts of signal generators and oscilloscopes.

CO2 Understand
Apply the knowledge of different Electromechanical Indicating Instruments to

CO3 Apply
measure the physical quantities.
Analyze the performance characteristics of measuring instruments
CO4 Analyze
Apply the knowledge of Signal Generators to measure the unknown

CO5 Apply
quantities
CO6 Analyze the characteristics of spectrum analyzer for various industrial Analyze
application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016.
2. Swahney, A.K.,―A Course in Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation, Dhanpat
Rai& Co, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. B.L.Theraja and A.K.Theraja, A textbook of electrical technology
Volume1―S.Chand&company limited,2005.
2. Helfric AD and Cooper WD, ―Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement
Techniques, PHI,1992.
Course Designer: P.Selva prasanth, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 3 3 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 3.0 3.0 2.0
ELECTRONIC DEVICES L T P C
21UEC205 (INTEGRATED COURSE)
2 0 3 3.5
OBJECTIVES:
● To explain the basic physical structure, principles of operation &
electrical characteristics of diodes.
● To make the students understand the construction, operation and characteristics of BJT,
FET and MOSFET.
● To give an idea about the characteristics and behavior of special
semiconductor devices.
UNIT 1 SEMICONDUCTORS 30
Classification of solids based on energy band theory - Classification of semiconductors- Diffusion
current, drift current, mobility and resistivity - Theory of PN junction diode – Zener diode and
its characteristics.
Applications: Rectifiers - Half-wave, Full-wave and Bridge - Zener diode as Voltage
regulator, PIN diode, SCR characteristics, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT, Laser, LED, LCD. Lab
Support :
1. Characteristics of PN diode
2. Characteristics of Zener diode and voltage regulator using Zener diode.
3. Half wave rectifier and full wave rectifier with capacitor filter
4. Bridge rectifier with capacitor filter.
5. Characteristics of phototransistor
6. Characteristics of SCR
UNIT 2 BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS 15
Formation of PNP / NPN junctions - Transistor mechanism and principle of transistors - CE, CB,
CC configuration - Transistor characteristics: cut-off active and saturation mode, transistor action,
injection efficiency - Current amplification factors for CB and CE modes. Lab Support :
1. Characteristics of CE configuration
2. Characteristics of CB configuration.
UNIT 3 FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS 15

JFET – Construction and Operation of N-Channel, P-channel – Characteristic parameters -
Drain characteristics – Transfer characteristics– Comparison of JFET and BJT – Applications
of JFET, MOSFET : Enhancement MOSFET – Depletion MOSFET– Comparison of N and P-
Channel MOSFETs
Lab Support :
1. Characteristics of JFET and MOSFET
TOTAL : 60 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the fundamental concept of various electronic Devices. Understand
CO2 Impart the knowledge of PN Junctions in semiconductor Understand

devices for various applications.
Design voltage regulators and simple rectifiers using Diodes.
CO3 Apply
CO4 Analyze the various parameters of transistors for suitable Analyze
application.
Design and analyze simple BJT circuits for various applications. Apply
CO5
Analyze the various parameters of FET for suitable Analyze
CO6
application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Salivahanan S., Suresh kumar N. and Vallavanraj A., ― Electronic

Devices and Circuits‖, Tata McGraw Hill., 4th Edition, 2017.
2. David A. Bell, ―Electronic Circuits and Electron Devices‖, Oxford University
Press, Anna Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert T. Paynter, ―Introducing Electronics Devices and Circuits‖,

Pearson Education, Seventh Edition, 2010.
2. Millman J. &Halkins and Satyebranta Jit, ―Electronic Devices
&Circuits‖, Tata Mc- Graw Hill, Second Edition, 2008.
Course Designer: P.Selva prasanth, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2
CO 5 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0
BASIC SCIENCE - II LABORATORY L T P C
21UGS210
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES:
 To analyze the Band gap, moment of inertia, thermal conductivity and rigidity modulus of the
materials.
 To gain knowledge in PHOTONICS.
1. Determination of Energy band gap of a semiconductor.

2. Torsion pendulum – Determination of Moment of inertia of a metallic disc and rigidity
modulus of a given metallic wire.
3. Spectrometer - Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum using grating.
4. Laser – Determination of numerical aperture and acceptance angle of an optical fiber
5. Newton‘s rings – Determination of radius of curvature of a convex lens
6. Lee‘s Disc - Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
7. Determination of Solar cell characteristics using optical transducers kit.
8. Digital Logic gates (Virtual lab)
A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the Principles of Optics, Light and Elasticity to determine the Engineering
CO1 Apply
properties of materials
Analyze the thermal conductivities of different bad conductors
CO2 Analyze
CO3 Analyze the Characteristics of a semiconductor Analyze
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(Common to All Branches)
OBJECTIVES:
 To describe the theoretical concepts to perform lab experiments.
 To explain the water quality parameters.
 To impart the knowledge on water quality parameters for the analysis of industrial effluents
1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method.
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample.
3. Estimation of Chloride in water sample (Argentometric method)
4. Determination of DO in water
5. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
6. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
7. Estimation of iron by Spectrophotometry.
8. Determination of acidity of industrial effluents. A
minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the basic knowledge of water quality testing for
CO1 Apply
environmental sustainability.
Analyze the water quality parameters for industrial effluents to prevent
CO2 Analyze
water pollution.
Estimate the quality of water that suits for domestic and industrial
CO3 Apply
applications
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 1 1 1
CO 5 3 1 1 1 1
CO 6 3 1 1 1 1
CAM
(Avg) 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2 2 2.00
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE L T P C
21UGM231
2 0 0 P/F
OBJECTIVES:
 To explain the concepts of Environment and ecosystem.
 To describe the knowledge about the impact of environmental pollution.
 To impart the environmental issues in the society.
 To explain the knowledge about the impact of environment related to human
health.
 To describe the knowledge in alternative energies.
UNIT 1 ENVIRONMENTAND ECOSYSTEMS 9

Definition, scope and importance of environment – Need for public awareness – Concept of
ecosystem– Structure and function of ecosystem– Producers, consumers and decomposers- Food
chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features,
structure and function of the (a) Forest ecosystem (b) Aquatic ecosystems (c)
Grassland ecosystem.
UNIT 2 ENVIRONMENTALPOLLUTION 9
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution
- pollution case studies - Role of an individual in prevention of pollution – Disaster
management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides..
UNIT 3 SOCIAL ISSUES ANDTHEENVIRONMENT 9

Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – Climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies.
Environmental laws/Acts, (EPA).
UNIT 4 HUMAN POPULATION ANDTHEENVIRONMENT 9

Population growth, variation among nations – Population explosion – Human rights – Family
welfare programme – Environment and Human Health – Human Rights -Value education – HIV /
AIDS – Women and child welfare – Role of information technology in environment and human
health.
UNIT 5 FUTURE POLICYAND ALTERNATIVES 9

Introduction to future policy and alternatives-fossil fuels-nuclear energy-solar energy-wind energy -
hydroelectric energy-geothermal energy - tidal energy – sustainability - green power- nanotechnology.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concept of structure and function of
CO1 Understand
ecosystem.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of various pollution types to prevent the
Apply
ecosystem and Environment
Analyze the environmental problem to report the social issues and
CO3 Analyze
the environment
CO4 Compare the suitable methods for conservation and sustainable
Analyze
development of natural resources
Apply the principles of value education with respect to human
CO5 Apply
population to preserve environment
CO6 Analyze the current energy crisis and suggest a suitable

Analyze
sustainable alternatives that promotes social health and
environmental prospects
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik, kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering‖ ,Third

Edition, New Age International, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Benny Joseph ― Environmental Science and Engineering‖ , Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New
Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Gilbert M.Masters, ‗ Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science

,Pearson Education,Upper saddle River, New Jersey, 2008
2. Miller T.G. Jr., Environmental Science‖ , Wadsworth PublishingCompany, Belmont,
California, 2005
3. De A.K., ― Environmental Chemistry‖ , Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,2001
4. Trivedi R.K., Goel P.K., ― Introduction to Air Pollution‖ , Techno-Science Publication, Jaipur
2005
SEMESTER III
SEMESTER III
S. Course Course
No. Code Category
Theory Courses
Numerical Analysis and Linear

1. 21UMA323 BS 3 1 0 4
Algebra (Only for ECE)
2. 21UEC302 Digital Electronics and Design PC 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC303 Circuit Theory PC 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC304 Signals and Systems PC 3 1 0 4
5. 21UEC305 Electronic Circuits PC 3 0 0 3
Fundamentals of C Programming
6. 21UIT326 ES 2 0 2 3
(Integrated Course)
Laboratory Courses
7. 21UEC306 Digital Electronics Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
8. 21UEC307 Electronic Circuits Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
Biology for Engineers

9. 21UGM331 (Common to all branches-Except MC 2 0 0 P/F
BME)
Total 19 2 6 22
Total Credits : 22
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS AND LINEAR L T P C
21UMA323 ALGEBRA 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
● To acquaint the student with understanding of numerical techniques of differentiation and
integration which plays an important role in engineering and technology disciplines.
● To make the student acquire sound knowledge in applications of numerical methods in
various fields, solving practical technical problems using scientific and mathematical tools
when available in Engineering.
● To apply the concept of Inner product space in orthogonalization.
UNIT I NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL 9+3

INTEGRATION
Derivatives from difference tables – Divided differences and finite differences – Numerical
integration by Trapezoidal and Simpson„s 1/3 and 3/8 rules – Romberg„s method – Two point
and Three point Gaussian quadrature formulae
UNIT II NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL 9+3

EQUATIONS
Single step methods: Taylor series method – Euler method for first order equation –
Fourth order Runge – Kutta method for solving first and second order equations –
Multistep methods: Milne„s and Adam„s predictor and corrector methods.
UNIT III NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 9+3

EQUATIONS
Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation – Finite difference solution
of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods – One dimensional wave
equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations.
UNIT IV VECTOR SPACES 9+3

Linear dependence of vectors, basis, dimension, linear transformations(maps), range and kernel of
a linear map, rank and nullity inverse of a linear transformation rank nullity theorem
, composition of linear maps, matrix associated with a linear map
UNIT V INNER PRODUCT SPACE 9+3

Inner product space, Norm of a vector matrix vector, Cauchy Schwarz inequality Triangle
inequality, orthogonal space
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the Numerical techniques of Differentiation and Integration for
CO1 Engineering Problems. Apply
Apply the knowledge of numerical techniques and methods Apply

CO2
for solving first and second order Ordinary Differential Equation.
Apply Partial Differential Equation with initial and boundary

Apply
conditions by using certain techniques with engineering
CO3 applications
Apply the knowledge in structure and principles of vector space
CO4 Apply
through linear independence namely basis
Apply inner product and determine orthogonally on vector spaces
including Cauchy Schwarz inequality,
CO5 Triangle inequality Apply
Understand the knowledge of basis and norm of a vector and
CO6 Understand
nature of partial differential equation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GREWALB.S,―HigherEngineeringMathematics‖,KhannaPublishers,NewDelhi, 42nd
Edition, (2012).
2. KANDASAMY.P, THILAGAVATHY.K, and GUNAVATHY.K, Numerical Methods,
S.Chand& Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2rd Edition,(2012).
3. DAVID, C., LAY, ―Linear Algebra and its applications‖ 4th Edition Published by
Addison Wesley / Pearson,2011.
REFERENCES:
1. BALI N.P., MANISH GOYAL and WATAINS, ―Advanced EngineeringMathematics‖, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Laxmi Publication Private limited) New Delhi, 7thEdition, (2009).
2. David C. Lay, ―Linear Algebra and its applications‖ 3rd Edition updated Pearson Education,
(2005).
3. RAMANA.B.V,―HigherEngineeringMathematics‖TataMcGrawHill,NewDelhi,11thRepri nt
(2010).
4. Peter, D. Lax, ―Linear Algebra and its applications‖ 2nd Edition Wiley-Interscience
Publication, (2007).
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 1 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 1 2 2 2
CO 4 3 1 2 2 2
CO 5 3 1 2 2 2
CO 6 3 1 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3 1 2 2 2
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND DESIGN L T P C
21UEC302
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To Introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra
 To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational and
sequential circuits
 To introduce the concept of memories, programmable logic devices, synchronous and
asynchronous circuits
UNIT 1 NUMBER SYSTEM, LOGIC GATES AND MINIMIZATION 9

TECHNIQUES
Number Systems- Binary Arithmetic - Addition, Subtraction, Complementary numbering systems:
1s and 2s Complements, Logic Gates: AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, Exclusive– OR and
Exclusive–NOR- NAND–NOR implementations Minimization -Boolean postulates and laws – De-
Morgan„s Theorem -Principle of Duality - Boolean expression - Minimization of Boolean expressions-
Minterm – Maxterm - Sum of Products (SOP) – Product of Sums (POS) – Karnaugh map
Minimization – Don„t care conditions - Quine-McCluskey method of minimization
UNIT 2 COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9

Design procedure – Half adder – Full Adder – Half subtractor – Full subtractor -Parallel binary
adder, parallel binary Subtractor – Fast Adder - Carry Look Ahead adder – Serial
Adder/Subtractor - BCD adder – Binary Multiplier – Binary Divider - Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
– decoder - encoder – parity checker – parity generators – code converters - Magnitude
Comparator
UNIT 3 SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Latches, Flip-flops -Characteristic table and equation–Application table – Edge triggering – Level
Triggering – Realization of one flip flop using other flip flops –Asynchronous counter -
Synchronous counters –Design of Synchronous counters: - Modulo–n counter, Registers – shift
registers - Universal shift registers– Shift register counters -Sequence generators
UNIT 4 SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL 9
CIRCUITS
Synchronous Sequential Circuits: General Model – Classification – Design –Analysis of
Synchronous Sequential Circuits Asynchronous Sequential Circuits: Design of fundamental mode and
pulse mode circuits – Incompletely specified State Machines – Problems in Asynchronous
Circuits – Design of Hazard Free Switching circuits.
UNIT 5 MEMORY DEVICES 9

Classification of memories – ROM organization -Types of ROM - RAM organization - Types
of RAM –Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) – Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) – Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation of
combinational logic circuits using ROM, PLA, PAL
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the functions of the various building blocks of digital Understand
circuits
CO2 Apply the fundamental concepts of digital electronics to design Apply

digital circuits
CO3 Analyze the digital circuits to verify their functionalities
Analyze
CO4 Evaluate the function of digital circuits using the fundamental Evaluate
concepts
Design digital circuits for real time applications Create
CO5
CO6 Simulate logic circuits using a software that is used to design Apply
and simulate logic circuits
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Morris Mano, Digital Design with an introduction to the VHDL,

Pearson Education,2013.
2. S.Salivahanan, S. Arivazhagan „Digital Circuits and Design„ Oxford
university press,2018
REFERENCES:
1. Comer ―Digital Logic & State Machine Design, Oxford, 2012.
2. Mandal, ―Digital Electronics Principles & Application, McGraw Hill Edu, 2013.
3. D.P.Kothari,J.S.Dhillon, ‗Digital circuits and Design„,Pearson Education, 2016.
Course Designer: Mrs.P.Deepa, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO 6 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.83 3.00 2.66 2 3 3.00 2 2.00 2.33
21UEC303 CIRCUIT THEORY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To learn an engineering circuit analysis technique such as nodal analysis, and mesh
analysis.
● To explain Network theorems and their applications to electric circuits.
● To familiarize resonant, coupled, transient circuits, and two port networks.
UNIT I CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (BOTH DC & AC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS) 9

Circuit Elements-Network graphs- Concept of branch, link, tree and co-tree- dual networks- Ohm‟s
Law-Kirchoff‟s voltage law – Kirchoff‟s current law – Mesh analysis – Super mesh analysis –
Nodal analysis – Supernode analysis – Source transformation technique – Voltage and current
source transformations- Star delta transformation.
UNIT II NETWORK THEOREMS (ONLY DC CIRCUITS) 9

Superposition theorem – Thevenin‟s theorem – Norton‟s theorem – Reciprocity theorem –
Compensation theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem – Tellegen‟s theorem – Millman
theorem
UNIT III RESONANT CIRCUITS AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 9

Series and parallel resonance –frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth - Self and
mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits.
UNIT IV TRANSIENT CIRCUITS 9

Transient response of RL, RC and RLC series and parallel circuits – frequency response – step
and sinusoidal responses – natural frequency, damped frequency, damping factor and logarithmic
decrement.
UNIT V TWO PORT NETWORKS 9

Driving point and transfer impedances/admittances – voltage and current ratios of two port
networks – admittance, impedance, hybrid, transmission and image parameters for two- port
networks - Interconnection of two port networks.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic properties of circuit elements.
CO1 Understand
Apply the basic laws to compute voltage and current in AC and DC

CO2 Apply
circuits
Apply the various network theorems to compute power in
CO3 Apply
DC circuits.
CO4 Analyze the characteristics of resonant and coupled circuits. Analyze
Analyze the frequency response of transient circuits.

CO5 Analyze
Evaluate the various parameters of two port networks.

CO6 Evaluate
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.Sudhakar, Shyam Mohan S P “Circuits and Networks: Analysis & Synthesis”, Tata
McGraw - Hill, 5th edition, 2015.
2. William H.Hyte, J.E.Kemmerly, Steven M.Durban “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata
McGraw – Hill, 8th edition.
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph Edminister, “Electric circuits”, Schaums Outline Series, McGraw-Hill, 6th

edition, 2013.
2. M.Arumugam, N.Premkumar “Electric circuit Theory”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2006.
3. M.L.Soni, J.C Gupta “Electrical Circuit Analysis”, DhanpatRai and Sons, New Delhi 2006.
4. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O.Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuit”,
McGraw-Hill‟s New York,2003
Course Designer: P.John Pragasam, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO 4 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO 6 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.5 2.5 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
L T P C
21UEC304 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concept of continuous and discrete signals and systems
 To introduce various transformation techniques to analysis CT and DT signals and
systems
 To explain the conversion of Continuous time to discrete time signal .
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Classification of signals: Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals - Standard signals -
Basic operations on signals - properties of signals - Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic &
Random signals, Even and Odd signals, Energy & Power signals, Classification of systems: CT
systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant & Time-invariant, static and Dynamic,
Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable. - Linear Time invariant Systems
and properties.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES AND FOURIER TRANSFORM 9+3

Fourier Series Signal Analysis: Introduction – Trigonometric Fourier Series for Periodic Signals –
Exponential Fourier Series – Symmetry Properties – Properties of Fourier Series – Parseval’s
Theorem. Fourier Transform: Introduction – Fourier Integral – Energy Spectral Density – Fourier
Transform Properties – System Analysis – Impulse response
CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS

UNIT III 9+3
USING LAPLACE TRANSFORM
Laplace Transform - Inverse Laplace Transform- Laplace transform properties-LTI CT System
Analysis – Frequency Domain solution – Frequency, Impulse and steady state response– Analysis
of Electrical Circuits - Convolution Integral-Block Diagram realization -
DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING

UNIT IV 9+3
DTFT
Sampling and aliasing - DTFT - Properties of DTFT-LTI DT System Analysis – Frequency
Domain solution - Frequency, Impulse response– Convolution sum.
DISCRETE-TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS ANALYSIS USING Z

UNIT V 9+3
TRANSFORM
Z-Transform –– Inverse Z-Transform -Properties– LTI DT System Analysis – Frequency Domain
solution – Frequency, Impulse response– Convolution Sum - Block
Diagram realization.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamental concepts of continuous time and Understand
CO1 Discrete time (CT/DT) signals and systems
Determine the classifications of the CT/DTsignals and systems Apply
CO2
according to their properties
Apply various transformation techniques to derive Continuous
CO3 time and Discrete time signals and linear time invariant Apply
systems.
Analyze the time-domain and frequency domain approaches Analyze
CO4
of continuous and discrete systems.
Evaluate the characteristics of CT/DT systems using Evaluate
CO5
properties of convolution.
Comment on various kinds of canonical block diagram
CO6 Evaluate
realization for any given systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Simon Haykins, Barry Van Veen, “ Signals and Systems ”, John Wiley & sons Inc, 2004
2. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky, S.H.Nawab ,“Signals and Systems ”, Pearson Education
,2nd Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Hwei Hsu, Schaum‟s Outline of Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. H P Hsu, RakeshRanjan, “Signals and Systems”, Schaum‟s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill, Indian
Reprint, 2007.
3. M J Roberts, “Signals and Systems – Analysis using Transform Methods and MATLAB”,
TataMcGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Steven T. Karris, “Signals and Systems: With Matlab Applications”, Orchard Publications, 2003
Course Designer: Dr.M.Parisa Beham, Head/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO 6 3 3 3 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3.00 2.50 2.67 2.00 2.00 2.00
21UEC305 L T P C
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To familiarize the students about the mid band analysis of amplifier circuits using small-
signal equivalent circuits.
• To summarize the method of analyzing large signal and feedback amplifiers.
• To impart knowledge on design of sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal oscillators.
UNITI MIDBANDANALYSISOFSMALLSIGNALAMPLIFIERS 9
Biasing schemes for BJT and FET amplifiers, bias stability, various
configurations (such as CE/CS, CB/CG, CC/CD) and their features, small signal
analysis
FREQUENCYRESPONSEOFSINGLESTAGE
UNITII 9
ANDMULTISTAGEAMPLIFIERS
General shape of frequency response of amplifiers - Definition of cutoff
frequencies and bandwidth - Low frequency analysis of amplifiers to obtain
lower cutoff frequency, High frequency analysis of amplifiers to obtain upper
cutoff frequency, High frequency transistor models for BJT and FET amplifiers,
Unity Gain-Bandwidth product, General expression for frequency response of
multistage amplifiers
– Amplifier rise time , sag time and their relation to cut off
frequencies, design procedure for given parameters.
UNITIII POWERAMPLIFIERS 9
Classification of amplifiers, Class A large signal amplifiers and Direct-
coupled Class A audio power amplifier - transformer- coupled Class A audio
power amplifier – efficiency and linearity issues,ClassBamplifier–push-
pullamplifier-distortioninamplifiers- complementary-symmetry (Class B)
push-pull amplifier - efficiency, class AB-Class C,MOSFET power amplifier,
Thermal stability and heat sink.
UNITIV FEEDBACKAMPLIFIERS 9
Block Diagram of Feedback amplifiers, Voltage series , current series,
voltage shunt, current shunt, effect of feedback on gain, bandwidth etc.,
concept of stability, gain margin and phase margin
,design of feedback amplifiers
UNITV OSCILLATORS 9
Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators(phase shift,
Wien bridge ), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp ), non- sinusoidal
oscillators, Frequency range of
RC and LC Oscillators, crystal oscillator, non-
sinusoidal oscillators- UJT relaxation oscillator, negative
resistance oscillator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the characteristics of amplifiers and oscillators. Understand

CO2 Apply the knowledge of stabilization technique for
analyzing the operation of amplifier in mid band region. Apply
Analyze the amplifier and oscillator circuits to verify their
CO3 functionalities. Analyze
Evaluate the function of amplifier and oscillator circuits using the
CO4 suitable electronic devices. Evaluate
Design the amplifier Circuit for real time applications
CO5 Create
Design amplifier and oscillator using PSPICE Modern Tool
CO6
Usage
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Salivahanan.S, SureshKumar.N, Vallavaraj.A Electronic Devices and Circu its,TMH,
4th Edition, 2017.
2. Robert L.Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory,Pearson Education/PHI,11thEdition,2013.
3. R.S.Sedha, A textbook of Electronic Circuits,S.Chand,4thedition,2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Millman.J, Halkias.C, Integrated Electronics, TMH, 2nd edition, 2010.
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices & Circuits, PHI, 4th Edition, 2007.
3. Floyd, Electronic Devices, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2002.
4. Nagrath.I.J, Electronic Devices and Circuits, PHI, 2007.
Course Designer: Mr.R.Abdul Sikkandhar, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO 6 3 2 3 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.83 2.60 2 3 2.3 2 2.17
21UIT326 FUNDAMENTALS OF C PROGRAMMING L T P C
(INTEGRATED COURSE) 2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop C Programs using basic programming constructs
 To develop C programs using functions, array and string
 To develop applications in C using pointers and structures
MODULE 1 BASICS OF C, DECISION CONTROL AND LOOPING
UNIT I 10+10
STATEMENTS
Introduction to C - Introduction, Structure of C program, Writing simple C
Program, Input and Output statements, Conditional Branching Statements
- Iterative Statements, Nested Loops, Break and Continue Statements,
goto Statement.
List of Experiments:
1. Implement Simple C Programs
2. Implement C programs using Operators
3. Implement C Programs using Decision Control statements
4. Implement C Programs using Looping statements
UNIT II MODULE 2 ARRAYS, STRINGS AND FUNCTIONS 10+10

Arrays – Introduction, Declaration of Arrays, Accessing the Elements of
an Array, Operations on Arrays, Passing Arrays to functions, Two
dimensional Arrays, Multidimensional Arrays, Strings
– Introduction, Operations on Strings, Arrays of Strings.
Function: Introduction, function declaration and definition, function call,
return statement, passing parameter to function, Storage classes,
Recursive function.
1. Implement C Programs using Arrays
2. Implement C Programs using Strings
3. Implement C Programs using Function
UNIT III MODULE 3 – POINTERS AND STRUCTURES 10+10
Pointers - Introduction to Pointers - Declaring Pointer Variables, Pointers

and Arrays, Pointers to Pointers, Dynamic memory allocation, Structure -
Introduction, Nested Structures, Arrays of Structures, Structures and
Functions.
1. Implement C Programs using Pointers
2. Implement C Programs using array of Pointer
3. Implement C Programs using Structures
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Infer the Knowledge of fundamental C programming
CO1 Understand
concepts
Apply various concepts of C program for solving
CO2 Apply
problems
Analyze different features of C program for a given
CO3 Understand
scenario
Design a solution without anomalies using C
CO4 Design
programming concept for the given applications
Select and apply appropriate tools to implement any few
CO5 Modern Tool Usage
concepts of C programming
Identify the requirement and take further preparation in order to Lifelong learning /
CO6
adopt Technological change Communication
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ReemaThareja,‖ProgramminginC‖,2ndEdition,Oxforduniversitypress,2015.
2. YashavantP.Kanetkar,‖LetusC‖,5thEdition,BPBPublications,2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Brian.K.Kernighan, Dennis.M.Ritchie,‖ The C Programming Language
‖,2ndEdition, Pearson,
2. Pradip Dey,Manas Ghosh, ―Computer fundamentals and programming in
C‖, 2ndEdition, Oxford universitypress,2013.
3. Noel Kalicharan,‖Learn to program with C‖, Apress,2015.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2 2
CO 6 3 3 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2 2.00 2.00
L T P C
21UEC306 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To construct digital circuits using standard ICs.
 To expose the students to the aspect of designing and
implementing combinational and sequential circuits.
1. Design and implementation of Adder and Subtractor using logic gates.

2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates
a. BCD to excess-3 code and vice versa
b. Binary to gray and vice-versa
3. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ Subtractor and BCD adder using
MSI devices
4. Design and implementation of 2 bit Magnitude Comparator using logic
gates, 8 Bit Magnitude Comparator using MSI devices.
5. Design and implementation of 16 bit odd/even parity checker generator using MSI
devices
6. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer using logic gates.
7. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates.
8. Implementation of SISO, SIPO, PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip- flops.
9. Design and verification of 4 bit, Mod-10 / Mod-12 Ripple counters.
10. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design and Implement Combinational circuits using Logic Apply

CO1
Gates.
Implement Combinational circuits using MSI Devices.
CO2 Apply
Design and Construct Sequential circuits using Flip - Flops. Apply
CO3
Apply appropriate software tools to make measurements of

CO4 Apply
physical quantities.
CO5 Demonstrate proficiency in using discipline-specific tools Apply
Function effectively as an individual for efficiently executing the
CO6 given task Organize
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3
CO 6 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3 2 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 2 2
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
21UEC307
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize the students about the mid band analysis of amplifier circuits using small -
signal equivalent circuits.
 To summarize the method of analyzing large signal and feedback amplifiers.
 To impart knowledge on design of sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal oscillators.
1. Verification of KVL and KCL
2. Verification of Thevenin and Norton Theorems.
3. Verification of Superposition Theorem.
4. Verification of Maximum power transfer Theorem
5. Design of DC biasing circuit using potential divider arrangement.
6. Power Amplifiers – Class A Amplifier – measurement of gain.
7. Power Amplifiers – Complementary Symmetry class B Amplifier –measurement of gain.
8. Design of RC phase shift oscillator - Estimation of frequency of oscillation – compare with
theoretical value.
9. Design of Hartley oscillator - Estimation of frequency of oscillation – compare with
theoretical value.
10. Design of Colpitts oscillator - Estimation of frequency of oscillation – compare
with theoretical value.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Impart skills and apply knowledge to analyze feedback in Apply
amplifiers
Design and analyze various signal and power amplifier circuits
CO2 using BJTs and FETs Analyze
CO3 Design oscillator and amplifier circuits with frequency Analyze
capability in BJT and FET.
CO4 Apply appropriate instrumentation tools to make Apply
measurements of physical quantities
CO5 Use appropriate procedure to conduct experiments and collect data Apply
CO6 Adapt themselves to work in a group as a member or a leader for Organize

efficiently executing the given task
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3
CO 6 3 3 2 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.6 3 2.5 3 3 2.6 2 2 2
L T P C
21UGM331 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS
2 0 0 P/F
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide a basic understanding of biological mechanisms of living
organismsand the human biology from the perspective of engineers.
 To encourage engineering students to think about solving biological problems
withengineering principles and tools.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CLASSIFICATION 5

Introduction to Biology – Comparison of Biology and Engineering – Eye
and Camera – Bird flying and Aircraft – Brownian motion and
Thermodynamics – Classification – Unicellular or multicellular –
Unicellular: Bacteria, Protozoa, Yeast – Multi Cellular: Animals,
Humans, Plants, fungi etc. – Ultra structure: prokaryotes or
eukaryotes – Habitat: aquatic or terrestrial.
UNIT II DIGESTIVE & RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS – ENZYME 6
Study of digestive – Respiratory systems and their functions –Enzyme –
Classification of Enzyme – Mechanism of Enzyme activity–Enzymes for
Industrial Applications: Waste management – Food processing industry
– Beverages – Pharmaceutical – Paper Industryetc.
UNIT III GENETICS AND BIO MOLECULES (Basics only) 7
Basics of Genes – DNA structure – Genes and hereditary – Genetic Code
– Coding and decoding Genetic information – Gene Mapping – Gene
Interactions – Mutations – Genetic disorders – Gene therapy –
Biomolecules: Carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, proteins. Biological
Applications in Engineering: Genetic Algorithm – Computer
Application in Genetic Engineering – Genetic Programming–Genetic
Computers.
UNIT IV NERVOUS SYSTEM AND CELL SIGNALING 7
Central Nervous System: Brain and Spinal Cord – Peripheral Nervous
System – Sensory Division – Motor Division – Neurons – sensory, motor,
and inter neurons–Signals–Transfer of Information
– Bio Signals – Electrocardiography (ECG) –
Electroencephalography (EEG) – Electromyography (EMG) –
Electrooculography (EOG) – X-ray – CT Scan – MRI scan –
Biological Applications in Engineering–Neurons and Neural Network.
UNIT V BIOLOGY AND ITS INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION 5

Bioreactors – Biopharming – Recombinant vaccines – Cloning – Drug
discovery –Bioremediation – Biofertilizer – Biocontrol – Biofilters
–Biosensors – Biopolymers – Bioenergy – Biomaterials –
Biochips
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the fundamentals of living things, their classification,
CO1 cell structure and biochemical constituents. Understand
Apply the concept of plant, animal and microbial systems and

CO2 Apply
growth in real life situations
Analyze biological engineering principles and procedures
CO3 needed to solve societal issues. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS
1. R.C.Dubey, A Textbook of Biotechnology ,S.Chand Higher Academic Pub
lications,2013.
2. R.Khandpur, Biomedical instrumentation-Technology and applications ,McGraw
HillProfessional,2004.
REFERENCES:
1. ArthurT.Johnson,―Biology for Engineers ,CRC Press,Taylor and
Francis,2nd Edition,2019.
2. Cecie Starr, Ralph Taggart, Christine Evers and Lisa Starr, ―Cell Biology and
Genetics(Biology:The unity and diversity of life VolumeI) ,Cengage Learning, 12th
Edition,2008.
3. Gerard J. Tortora and Bryan H.Derrickson, ―Principles of Anatomy and
Physiology‖,15th Edition,Wiley publications,2016.
SEMESTER IV
SEMESTER IV
S. Course Course
Code Category
No.
Theory Courses
Probability, Statistics and Mathematical

1. 21UMA422 BS 3 1 0 4
Structures (Only for ECE)
Electromagnetic Fields and
2. 21UEC402 PC 3 1 0 4
Transmission Lines
3. 21UEC403 Data Communication and Networks PC 3 0 0 3
Linear Integrated Circuits

4. 21UEC404 PC 2 0 3 3.5
(Integrated Course)
5. 21UEC405 Analog and Digital Communication PC 3 0 0 3
Introduction to data structures and

6. 21UIT429 ES 2 0 2 3
algorithms (Integrated Course)
Laboratory Courses
Interpersonal Skills & Team building

7. 21UGS433 HSS 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory (Only for ECE)
Analog and Digital Communication
Mandatory Course
Gender Equality
9. 21UGM431 MC 1 0 0 P/F
Total 17 2 9 23
Total Credits : 23
L T P C
21UMA422
PROBABILITY, STATISTICS AND
3 1 0 4
MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic probability concepts and standard distributions that can
describe real life phenomena.
● To make the student acquire sound knowledge of fundamentals and applications of
statistics which will greatly help at the data analysis stage of comparative experiments.
● To familiarize the student to analyze the response of random inputs to linear time
invariant systems.
UNIT I PROBABILITY & RANDOM VARIABLES 9+3

Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability - Discrete and continuous random
variables - Moments - Moment generating functions and their properties. Binomial, Poisson, Normal and
Exponential- Joint probability distributions - Marginal and Conditional distributions – Covariance -
Correlation and Regression
UNIT II TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3
Sampling distributions - Normal, t, Chi-square and F distributions - Tests for single mean,
Proportion, Difference of means (large and small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of
variances – Chi-square test for goodness of fit – Independence of attributes
UNIT III DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3
Completely Randomized Design – Randomized Block Design – Latin Square Design
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9+3

Auto Correlation Functions - Cross Correlation Functions – Properties - Power Spectral density
- Cross spectral density - Applications of correlations and Spectral Densities.
UNIT V LOGIC AND PROOF METHODS 9+3
Propositional Logic – Propositional equivalences - Predicates and quantifiers – Nested Quantifiers
- Rules of inference - Introduction to Proofs - Proof Methods and Strategy
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the knowledge of concepts of probability to acquired
CO1 knowledge of standard Distributions. Apply
Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and
CO2 Analyze
large samples in Real life Problems
Analyze a process, to find its significance using design of
CO3 experiments Analyze
Apply the knowledge on random process to analyze the linear

CO4 system with random inputs in the areas of communication and Apply
signal processing
Apply basic probability techniques and models in linear systems
CO5 Apply
Understand the basic concept of probability , Random Variable
CO6 Understand
and statistics
TEXT BOOKS:
1 . GREWAL B.S, ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi,42nd Edition,(2012).
2. GUPTAS.C,KAPOORV.K.―FundamentalofMathematicalStatistics‖10thEdition,Su ltan
Chand and Sons, New Delhi,2002.
3. VEERARAJAN.T―ProbabilityandRandomProcesses‖4thEditionTataMcGraw-Hill,New Delhi,
(2015).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. SHARMA J.N , GOEL J.K ― Mathematical statistics ― 7th Edition Krishna
Prakasham Mandis, Mearut1998
2. Venkatarama Krishnan, ―Probability and Random Processes―, Wiley- Interscience
Publication,2006.
3. John A. Gubner., ―Probability and Random Processes For Electrical and
Computer Engineers‖, Cambridge University Press,(2006).
4. Alberto Leon-Garcia., ―Probability, Statistics and Random Processes For Electrical
Engineering‖, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall publisher,(2008).
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 1 1 2 2
CO 6 2 1 1 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.83 3.00 1.00 1 2.00 2.00
ELECTRO MAGNETIC FIELDS AND TRANSMISSION LINES L T P C
21UEC402
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To explain the relation between the fields under Static and Time varying situations
 To give an idea about symmetrical networks and various transmission line parameters
 To explain about EM propagation in guided systems.
UNIT 1 STATIC AND TIME VARYING ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 9
Review of Electromagnetic fields and its formulas - Poisson‟s and Laplace‟s equation- Capacitance of
various geometries using Laplace‟s equation- Faraday‟s law –Maxwell‟s Equation in integral form from
Faraday‟s Law, Ampere‟s circuital law, Gauss law – Equation expressed in point form - Maxwell‟s four
equations in integral form and differential form.
UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

Derivation of Wave Equation – Uniform Plane Waves – Plane waves in free space and in a
homogenous material-Wave equation for a conducting medium – Plane waves in lossy dielectrics –
Propagation in good conductors – Skin effect – Reflection of Uniform Plane Waves – normal and
oblique incidence, Brewster angle.
UNIT III FILTERS AND TRANSMISSION LINE 9
PARAMETERS
Characteristic impedance of Symmetrical Networks – Filter fundamentals – Constant K Filters - Low

pass, High pass, band pass, band elimination filters - Transmission lines - General Solution-Line
Distortion, Distortion less line, Reflection, Reflection Coefficient
UNIT IV THE LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCY 9

Introduction- standing wave ratio -standing wave ratio on a line- input impedance of open and short
circuited lines -λ/4 line,λ/2 line,3λ/4 line- Impedance matching –smith chart and its applications –
Problem solving using Smith chart. Reflection on a line not terminated in Zo, Reflection Coefficient, Open
and short circuited lines, Insertion loss.
UNIT V GUIDED WAVES BETWEEN PARALLEL PLANES 9
Transmission of TM waves between Parallel planes – Transmission of TE waves between Parallel

planes. Transmission of TEM waves between Parallel planes – TE, TM waves in Rectangularw
aveguide.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the fundamental concepts of Electromagnetic Fields and

CO1 Understand
Transmission Lines
Apply Maxwell‘s equations to solutions of problems relating to

CO2
uniform plane wave propagation and transmission lines Apply
Design filters for various cut-off frequencies

CO3
Apply
Analyze the wave propagation parameters indifferent mediums
CO4
Analyze
Analyze the transmission lines and their parameters using the
CO5 Smith Chart Analyze
CO6 Analyze the field components of different waveguides and Analyze

planar transmission lines based on various modes of E and H
field.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Hayt.W.H.,BuckJ.A, “Engineering Electromagnetics” , TATA McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition , 2007

2. .C.Jordan, K.G. Balmain, “E.M.Waves& Radiating Systems”,Pearson Education, 2006
3. John D.Ryder, “Networks, lines and fields” , Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Joseph Edminister, “Schaum‟s Series, Electromagnetics” , Tata Mc-graw Hill,2007

2. G S N Raju, “Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines”, Pearson Education,2006.
3. Matthew, Sadiku.N.O.,“Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics” , Oxford University Press, 6th
edition, 2015.
4. Philip C. Magnusson, Andreas Weisshaar, Vijai K. Tripathi, Gerald C. Alexander,
“Transmission Lines and Wave Propagation” , CRC Press, Fourth Edition, 2006
5. Ramo, Whineery and Van Duzer, “Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics”
, John Wiley, 2003.
Course Designer: V.Michael vinolin rinoj, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 - 2 2
CO 2 3 - 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 3 3 2 2
L T P C
21UEC403 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To give an overview of the functions of different layers
 To impart knowledge on IEEE standards employed in computer networking
 To familiarize the students with different protocols and network components
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKING AND 9

MODELS
Data communication Components – Data representation and Data flow- Types of Connections
– Topologies- Protocols and Standards – OSI model, TCP/IP model- Transmission
Media-Switching
UNIT II DATA LINK LAYER 9

Framing -Flow Control and Error control – Stop and Wait – Go back – N ARQ – Selective
Repeat ARQ – Sliding Window – Piggybacking – Random Access – controlled access. –
LAN –Wired LANs: Ethernet, Wireless LANs-IEEE 802.11, Virtual LANs.
UNIT III NETWORK LAYER 9
Logical addressing – IPV4, IPV6, Addresses–IPV4, IPV6, Address mapping–ARP, RARP,
BOOTP, ICMP, IGMP and DHCP–Routing-Unicast Routing protocols.
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Process to Process Delivery – User Datagram Protocol – Transmission Control Protocol –
Congestion Control with Examples. QoS and techniques to improve QoS.
UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9

Domain Name System (DNS) - Basics of EMAIL - FTP, FTP Connections – WWW –
HTTP- Cryptography- Basic Concepts, symmetric key and public key cryptography
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the concepts of data communication and networks Understand
Apply the knowledge of network models to compute the network
CO2 Apply
parameters
Analyze the parameters of the network protocols used in Analyze
CO3
different layers
Analyze the performance parameter of computer network using
CO4 Analyze
any network simulation software
Select the most appropriate networking architecture and
CO5 analyze the requirements for a given organizational structure. Evaluate
Design and simulate the given network using network Apply

CO6
simulation software
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw– Hill, Fourth
Edition,2011.
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum , David J. Wetherall, Computer Networks, 5th Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication”, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
2. Larry L.Peterson, Peter S. Davie, “Computer Networks”, Elsevier, Fifth Edition, 2012
3. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top–Down Approach Featuring the
Internet”, Pearson Education, 2005.
Course Designer: Ms.Judith, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO 6 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 2.6 2.5 2 2.5 2 2 2.8
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
21UEC404 (INTEGRATED COURSE)
2 0 3 3.5
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge in basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits

● To make the students to learn the linear and non-linear applications of
operational amplifiers
● To familiarize some special function ICs
● To prepare the students to learn the types of ADC and DAC
UNIT 1 BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 20
Current sources, Voltage sources, Basic information about op-amps – Ideal Operational Amplifier -
General operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC 741, DC and AC performance
characteristics, slew rate, Open and closed loop configurations with different input configurations.
Applications of op-amps.
1. Inverting, Non inverting and differential amplifiers.
2. Integrator and Differentiator.
3. Instrumentation amplifier
UNIT 2 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS APPLICATIONS AND 25

SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs
Sign Changer, Scale Changer, Phase Shift Circuits, V-to-I and I-to-V converters, adder, subtractor,
Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Differentiator, Logarithmic amplifier, Antilogarithmic amplifier,
Comparators, Schmitt trigger, peak detector, clipper and clamper, filters, Sine-wave generators,
Multivibrators ,Saw-tooth wave generator, ICL8038 Function generator, Timer IC 555, IC Voltage
regulators. Applications of Voltage regulators
1. Active low-pass and band-pass filters.
2. Schmitt Trigger using op-amp.
3. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op-amp.
4. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
UNIT 3 DATA CONVERTERS 25
Analog and Digital Data Conversions, D/A converter – specifications - weighted resistor type, R-
2R Ladder type, Voltage Mode and Current-Mode R - 2R Ladder types - switches for D/A converters,
high speed sample-and-hold circuits, A/D Converters – specifications - Flash type - Successive
Approximation type - Single Slope type – Dual Slope type. Applications of data convertors.
1. R-2R Ladder Type D- A Converter using Op-amp.
2. Study of SMPS simulation using SPICE: Filters using Op-amp
3. Multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
TOTAL : 70 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the concepts of linear integrated circuits

CO1 Understand
CO2 Design the linear and nonlinear applications of an Op-
Apply
Amp along with special function ICs
CO3 Analyze the various types of waveform generators, timers and
data converters. Analyze
Design amplifiers, oscillators, D-A converters using operational
CO4 Create
amplifiers.
Design filters using op-amp for a given specification
CO5 Apply
CO6 Analyze the performance of filters, multivibrators and A/D
Analyze
converter using SPICE.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, ―Linear Integrated Circuits‖, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2018, Fifth Edition.
2. Sergio Franco, ―Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits‖, 4th
Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2016
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, ―OP-AMP and Linear ICs‖, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall /
Pearson Education, 2015.
2. S.Salivahanan & V.S. Kanchana Bhaskaran, ―Linear Integrated Circuits ‖,
TMH,2nd Edition, 4 th Reprint, 2016.
3. Gray and Meyer, ―Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits
‖, Wiley International,5th Edition 2009
Course Designer: R.Abdul Sikkandar, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.83 2.60 3.00 3.00 3 3 3 2 2.00 2.83
Apply the knowledge of line coding techniques and
CO3 Apply
information theory for efficient baseband signaling L T P C
21UEC405
Compare the ANALOG
performance of DIGITAL
different types of analog
AND COMMUNICATION
CO4 modulation and analog to digital conversion techniques 3
Analyze 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Analyze the performance of efficient source and error control
CO5  coding
To introduce the basic concepts of information and Digital Communication
techniques Analyze in
baseband and pass band domains
 Evaluate the performance
To illustrate the signal spaceof different digital modulation
representation of signals and discuss the process of
CO6 techniques in terms of bandwidth,
sampling, quantization and codingsignal to noise
that are ratio and
fundamental Evaluate
to the digital transmission analog
probability
signals of error
 To impart the knowledge on spread source and error control coding techniques
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Simon Haykin and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems” John Wiley & Sons, Fifth Edition,
UNIT I
2016. AMPLITUDE MODULATION SYSTEMS 9
2. B.P. Lathi Baseband and“Modern
and Zhi Ding, Carrier Communication,
Digital and Analog Amplitude Modulation,
Communication” Generation and
Oxford
Demodulation
University Press, of Amplitude
Fifth Edition, 2018. Modulations, Double Side Band Suppressed
Carrier, Single Side Band, Vestigial Side Band, AM Transmitter and Receiver
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. JohnII G Proakis,
UNIT ANGLE and MasoudSalehi,
MODULATION “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”
SYSTEMS 9
Pearson, 2ndAngle
Edition, 2014.
Modulation: Generalized concept of Angle Modulation, Narrow-
2. Sam Shanmugam,
Band and “Digital and Analog
Wide-band Communication
FM, Phase systems”
Modulation, John Wiley,
Generation 2nd
and Demodulation
edition, 1992.of Angle Modulations, FM Transmitter and Receiver
3. Herbert
UNIT III Taub,
DIGITALDonald
DATA L Schilling,
TRANSMISSIONand GoutamSaha, “Principles of Communication 9
Systems” McGraw-Hill, Third Edition, 2008.
Pulse Modulation: Sampling Theorem, Quantization, Pulse Code Modulation,
Differential Pulse Code Modulation, Delta Modulation Digital Data Transmission:
Course Designer: P.Murugeswari,
Line coding, AP/ECE
Power spectral density of various line
codes, Inter Symbol Interference, Nyquist Criterion for Zero ISI, Regenerative
Repeater, Eye Diagram.
UNIT IV DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9
Carrier Systems: Amplitude Shift Keying, Phase Shift Keying, Frequency
Shift Keying, Differential Phase Shift Keying, Coherent Detection and Non-
Coherent Detection, BER Analysis, M-Ary Communication
UNIT V INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 9
Measure of Information, Entropy, Source Coding, Compact (Huffman) Code,
Discrete Memoryless Channels, Channel Coding Theorem, Information Capacity
Theorem. Error Correcting Codes: Linear Block Code, Cyclic Code,
Convolutional Codes, Viterbi Algorithm
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concepts of different modulation
CO1 techniques in baseband and pass band communication systems Understand
Apply the knowledge of mathematical theory to characterize

CO2 and construct analog and digital transmission schemes in time
and frequency domain Apply
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2 2
CO 6 3 3 3 2 2 2
CAM
2.83 2.6 2.3 2.00 2 2
(Avg)
L T P C
21UIT429 INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND
ALGORITHMS(IC) 2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop Programs to implement arrays and list using basic programming constructs
 To develop Programs to implement stack and queue using basic programming constructs
 To develop Programs to implement tree and graphs using basic programming constructs
UNIT I –LINEAR DATA STRUCUTRE – ARRAYS, LIST 10+10
Abstract Data Type – Approaches to design an Algorithm – Complexity –
Arrays: Accessing Elements – Operations – List ADT: Memory Allocation and
De-allocation – Singly linked lists – Circular linked lists – Doubly linked
lists – Applications of lists – Polynomial Manipulation Experiments:
1. Program to implement Arrays.
2. Program to implement List ADT
3. Program to implement Polynomial Arithmetic using Linked List
UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCUTRE – STACK, QUEUE 10+10
Stack ADT: Array & Linked Representation – Applications of Stack –
Balancing Parenthesis – Arithmetic expressions (Conversion & Evaluation)
– Recursion - Queue ADT: Array & Linked Representation – Circular Queue
– Applications of Queue.
Experiments:
1. Program to implement stack ADT using array and linked list
2. Program to implement stack and use it to Evaluate postfix
expression
3. Program to implement queue ADT use array and linked list
UNIT III NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCUTRE – TREE AND GRAPH 9+9
Tree – Basic Terminology – Traversal – Operations: Binary trees –
Expression Tree – Binary Search tree – AVL tree – Graph Terminology –
Representation of Graphs – Graph Traversal – Topological sort –
Minimum Spanning Tree – Shortest path algorithm.
Experiments:
1. Program to implement binary search tree
2. Program to implement insertion and deletion in AVL trees
3. Program to implement Prim„s and Kruskal„s algorithm using
priority queues to find MST of an undirected graph.
UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURE – GRAPH 8+8
Introduction – Graph Terminology – Representation of Graphs – Graph Traversal –
Topological sort– Minimum Spanning Trees – Prim„s and Kruskal„s Algorithm –
Shortestpathalgorithm–Dijkstra„salgorithm–Floyd„sAlgorithm–Warshall„s algorithm
Experiments:
1. Program to implement Prim„s algorithm using priority queues to find MST of an undirected
graph
Program to implement Kruskal„s algorithm using priority queues to find MST of an undirected
graph
UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING 8+8
Searching: Linear Search – Binary Search, Sorting: Selection Sort – Bubble Sort
– InsertionSort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Hashing: Hash Functions –
Separate Chaining – Open Addressing –Rehashing – Extendible Hashing.
Experiments:
1. Program to implement searching technique.
2. Program to implement sorting technique.
Program to implement hashing technique.
TOTAL : 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the various applications like linear and nonlinear data
CO1 structures to solve the problems in relevant Understand
applications
Apply the linear and non-linear data structures to solve variety of
CO2 Apply
computational problems.
Analyze the different Program to implementations of various data structure
CO3 algorithms and to calculate the Analyze
efficiency of algorithms.
Design and develop efficient linear, non-linear, data structure algorithms to Apply
CO4
solve problems
Evaluate the problems and find solutions using various linear and
CO5 Evaluate
non-linear applications.
Select and apply appropriate data structures to design algorithms using
CO6 Modern Tool Usage
modern tool
TEXT BOOKS
1. ReemaThareja, Data Structures Using C‖,Oxford University Press,Second Edition, 2014.
Weiss. M.A, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tenenbaum,‖Data Structures using
C‖,Pearson Education Asia,2004
2. Aho.V, Hopcroft.J.E, Ullman.J.D, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Pearson Education, 1st
Edition Reprint, 2006.
3. Gilberg.R.F, Forouzan.B.A, "Data Structures", Thomson India Education, 2nd Edition, 2005.
4. Sara Baase and A.Van Gelder, "Computer Algorithms", Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2005.
5. Cormen.T.H, C.A.Leiserson.B.A, R.L.Rivest and C.Stein, "Introduction to Algorithms",
Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2009.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 3 3
CO 6 3 2 2 3
CAM 2.1 2.3
(Avg) 3.00 7 3 ## 3.00
L T P C
21UGS433 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS & TEAM
BUILDING LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
List of Exercises
Part - A : Communication and Leadership Projects
I) Speech Projects
1. The Open up Speech (Prepared Speech)
2. Speech Organizing to the Point (Prepared Speech)
3. Table Topics Speech
II) Evaluation Projects
4. Speech Evaluation
5. TAG (Timer, Ah Counter and Grammarian)Evaluation
III) Leadership Roles
6. Speech Master of the Day
7. General Evaluator
8. Table Topics Master
Part - B : Problem-Solving and Decision- Making Project
IV) Quality Circle Project
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
L T P C
21UEC406 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
LABORATORY 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an overview of discrete time signals using simulation software
 To implement the various modulation and demodulation techniques.
 To demonstrate line coding
1. Generation of standard signals in continuous and discrete time domain
2. Amplitude Modulation Generation and Detection.
3. Frequency Modulation Generation and Detection
4. Verification of sampling theorem.
5. Pulse Code Modulation.
6. Digital modulation and Demodulation techniques – ASK, PSK and FSK (Hardware and
Software simulation) and Bit Error Rate analysis.
7. Line coding techniques
8. Pulse Modulation Techniques-PAM,PPM and PWM
9. Simulation of Linear block codes and cyclic codes
10. Simulation of convolutional codes and decoding algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Choose and implement suitable digital modulation technique for given Apply
constraints on data rate, bandwidth, power, fidelity, and complexity
Analyze the performance of a digital communication link when additive

CO2 noise is present in terms of the signal to noise ratio and bit error rate Analyze
CO3 Calculate the power and bandwidth requirements of modern Apply

communication systems, including those employing ASK, PSK, FSK
modulation formats
Apply appropriate instrumentation tools to make
CO4 Apply
measurements of physical quantities
Use appropriate procedure to conduct experiments and collect data
CO5 Apply
Adapt themselves to work in a group as a member or a leader for

CO6 Organize
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO 6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
L T P C
21UGM331 GENDER EQUALITY
1 0 0 P/F
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce basic concepts relating to gender and to provide logical understanding of
gender roles.
UNIT I GENDER SENSITIZATION 5

Definition of gender, Perspectives-Gender sensitive approach- Gender
and sex- Social construction of gender and gender roles- Socialization-
institutions of socialization- changing content and context of gender-need
for re-socialization. Gender Stereotyping and Gender Discrimination
UNIT II GENDER EQUALITY AND CONSTITUTION 5

Indian constitution related to equality - Fundamental rights - Directive
principles of state policy - right to equality - rights against exploitation
- cultural and educational rights - the right to constitutional remedy -
University Declaration of Human Rights - Enforcement of Human Rights for
Women and Children - Role of Cells and Counseling Centers- Internal
Complaints Committee - Legal AID cells, Help line, State and National
Level Commission
UNIT III GENDER ROLES & EQUALITY 5

Gender & Morality – Structural and functionalist views of Gender- Gender
in the Classroom-Beyond access for girls and boys- Gender equality in
schools- Gender equality and adult basic education- Developing capacity
to achieve gender equality in education- Individuality and removal of
gender stereotypes- Respect for each others-Promote equal Opportunity
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the social construction of gender and sexuality and
their influence in social context. Understand
CO2 Analyze how the concepts of gender equality are created,
maintained, and/or challenged Analyze
Apply concepts of gender roles and equality in classroom,
CO3 Apply
school, disciplinary or interdisciplinary creative, scholarly, and/or
activist project
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sheila Aikman and Elaine Unterhalter, ―Practicing Gender Equality in
Education‖, Oxfam GB,2007.
2. PasadenaandHackensack,―GenderrolesandEquality‖,SalemPress,2011.
SEMESTER V
SEMESTER V
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. 21UEC501 Digital Signal Processing PC 3 1 0 4
Microprocessors, Microcontrollers
2. 21UEC502 and Applications PC 3 0 0 3
Internet of Things and

3. 21UEC503 Applications ES 2 0 2 3
(Integrated Course)
4. 21UEC504 Antenna and Wave Propagation PC 3 0 0 3
5. PE – I Professional Elective – I PE 3 0 0 3
6. OE – I Open Elective – I OE 3 0 0 3
Reasoning and Aptitude (common

7. 21UGS531 to CSE, ECE, CSBS, AIDS, CSD BS 1 0 0 1
& AIML)
Laboratory Courses
Microprocessors, Microcontrollers and

8. 21UEC505 Applications Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
9. 21UEC506 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
10. 21UEC507 Creative Thinking and Innovation PW 0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course
11. 21UGT140 Heritage of Tamils MC 1 0 0 1
Total 19 1 8 24
Total Credits : 24
L T P C
21UEC501 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce about DFT and its computation techniques
● To impart knowledge on design techniques of digital filters
● To outline the concept of finite word length effects and digital signal processor
Unit – 1 DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 9+3

Introduction to DFT – Properties of DFT - Circular Convolution – Filtering methods based on DFT- Linear
Filtering of long data sequences - Overlap-add and save methods- FFT Algorithms -
Decimation in time and Decimation in frequency algorithms- Use of FFT in linear
filtering
Unit – 2 INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS 9+3
Design of analogue Butterworth and Chebyshev Filters – Frequency transformation in analogue
domain – Design of IIR digital filters using impulse invariance and bilinear
transform techniques – pre warping – Structures of IIR
Unit – 3 FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS 9+3
Symmetric and Anti symmetric FIR filters - Linear phase FIR filter -Fourier Series -Filter design using
windowing Techniques (Rectangular Window, Hamming Window, Hanning Window)- Frequency
sampling techniques-Structures of FIR
Unit – 4 FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS IN DIGITAL FILTERS 9+3

Binary fixed point and floating point number representations – Comparison
Quantization noise – truncation and rounding -Quantization noise power- input quantization error,
coefficient quantization error -limit cycle oscillations -Overflow error- signal scaling
Unit – 5 ADVANCE DSP TECHNIQUES AND DSP PROCESSOR 9+3
Multirate Signal Processing: Decimation, Interpolation -Sampling rate conversion by rational factor -
Architecture of DSP Processors & applications: Introduction to Programmable DSPs -Architecture of
TMS320C5x -TMS320C6xx DSP processors - Assembly language Instructions - Addressing Modes –
Applications
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the functions and fundamental concepts of
CO1 Understand
various DSP algorithms and processor.
Apply the knowledge of digital signal processing to design and
CO2 simulate digital filters using various transformation techniques. Apply
Analyze various digital signal processing algorithms
CO3 andmultirate signal processing systems. Analyze
Compare and evaluate various signal transformation techniques and

CO4 the impact of finite word length effects Evaluate
Design DSP / Multirate signal processing applications

CO5 using DSP processor with appropriate software. Create
Develop various DSP algorithms for real time applications

CO6 Apply
using open source/freeware software
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John G Proakis and, Dimitris G Manolakis,” Digital Signal Processing- Principles,
Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2010.
2. S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, C.Gnanapriya ” Digital Signal Processing ”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Oppenheim A V,” Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Mitra S K,” Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
3. David J. Defatta, Joseph G. Lucas, William S. Hodgkiss,” Digital signal processing: a
system design approach”, John Wiley, 1995.
4. B.Venkataramani, M.Bhaskar,” Digital Signal Processor, Architecture, Programming and
Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011
Course Designer : Mr.A.Nagaraj

.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 -
CO6 3 - - - - - - 2 -
CAM 2.8
1.5 3 3 3 - - - - - 2.5
(Avg) 3
MICROPROCESSORS ,MICROCONTROLLERS AND L T P C
21UEC502 APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop an in-depth understanding of the operation of microprocessors and
Microcontrollers, assembly language programming & interfacing techniques
● To introduce the hardware architecture, instruction set, programming and interfacing of 8051
microcontrollers.
● To introduce the modern tool usage for microprocessor and microcontroller-based
applications.
UNIT 1 INTEL 8086 ARCHITECTURE 9
Introduction to Microprocessor-Architectural advancement of microprocessors-Evolution of
Microprocessors-Introduction to Intel 8085-Architecture of INTEL 8086 (Bus Interface Unit, Execution unit)-
Pin Description-Bus cycles -8086 System configuration and Memory –Interfacing-
Minimum mode -Maximum mode configurations-Interrupt processing-Direct Memory Access -
Comparison between 8086 and 8088
UNIT 2 INTEL 8086 MICROPROCESSOR – INSTRUCTION SET AND 9
PROGRAMMING
Programmer Model of Intel 8086, Operand types -Operand Addressing -Intel 8086 Assembler
Directives -Instruction Set -Data transfer group-Arithmetic group -Logical group-Control transfer group -
Miscellaneous Instruction group(string, processor control group)
UNIT 3 MICROCONTROLLERS 9
INTEL 8-bit and 16 bit Microcontrollers : INTEL 8051 Internal Architecture- addressing modes
Programming 8051 and Interrupts, -Instruction set -Introduction to 16 Microcontrollers INTEL 8096
Architecture, instruction set and addressing modes of 8096.
UNIT 4 PERIPHERAL INTERFACING WITH MICROPROCESSOR AND 9
MICROCONTROLLER
Programmable peripheral interface (8255)-Keyboard display controller (8279)- Programmable
interval timers /Counter, (8253and 8254)-Digital to analog converter, analog to Digital Converter Traffic
light control,-Washing machine control -Stepper motor control
UNIT 5 PROGRAMMING WITH ARDUINO AND MASM 9
The Arduino uno hardware and software development environment –programming various sensors
using Arduino Uno IDE and MASM- Introduction to Atmel's AVR, the Microchip PIC processors, ARM
processors
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the architecture of 8086 microprocessors and 8051, Understand

8096 Microcontrollers and RISC processors
CO2 Develop an ALP for general purpose programming using 8086 and Apply
8051
CO3 Develop an ALP to interface peripheral devices with 8086 and Apply
8051
CO4 Apply the modern tools for various microprocessor and Apply
microcontroller-based application development
CO5 Analyze the functioning of microprocessor and Analyze

microcontroller for the given condition
CO6 Develop an application using ALP programming software and Create
IDEs
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture, programming and

system design using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096”, PHI, 2011
2. The 8051 Microcontroller architecture, Programming and Applications Ayala J.K Penram
International (2005) 3rd Edition
3. Massimo Banzi,Getting Started with Arduino , First Edition, pub. O‟Reilly, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Application with 8085”,

Penram International Publishing, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2005 3rd edition.
2. Mohammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi,“The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems” ,Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006.
3. A.K. Ray and K.M. Bhurchandi Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals, third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012
Course Designer : Ms.S.Ramya, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 - - - - - - - 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 3
CO6 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 3
CAM
2.83 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 2.3
(Avg)
L T P C
21UEC503 INTERNET OF THINGS AND APPLICATIONS
2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To explain about Internet of Things.
● To explain about IoT concepts such as sensing, actuation and communication.
● To impart the knowledge of Raspberry Pi in Internet of Things.
Unit – 1 Introduction to Internet of Things 10
Characteristics of IoT - Design Principles of IoT - IoT Architecture and Protocols - Enabling
Technologies for IoT- IoT Levels -IoT vs M2M - IoT Design Methodology: Design Methodology -
Challenges in IoT Design - IoT System Management - IoT Servers - Domain Specific IoTs –
Home, City, Environment, Energy, Agriculture and Industry.
Unit – 2 Programming Raspberry Pi 10
Basics of Raspberry Pi - Programming a Raspberry Pi - Interfacing of Relay with Raspberry Pi -

Interfacing of DC Motor with Raspberry Pi - Interfacing of LCD with Raspberry Pi - Interfacing LCD
with Raspberry Pi in I2C Mode - Interfacing of DHT11 Sensor with Raspberry Pi - Interfacing of
Ultrasonic Sensor with Raspberry Pi - Interfacing of Camera with Raspberry Pi - Play with Sensor:
Digital, Analog and Actuators.
Lab Support: Interfacing of Raspberry Pi with: Relay, Sensor, and Actuators.

Unit – 3 APPLICATIONS of IoT 10
Python and Arduino with Pyfirmata - Python GUI with Tkinter and Arduino - Data Acquisition with
Python and Tkinter - Connecting to the Cloud : Smart IoT Systems - Blynk Application with
Raspberry Pi - Cayenne Application with Raspberry Pi.
Lab Support: Smart IoT Systems: Smart Home - Traffic Management - Smart Agriculture System
- Smart city - Health care.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basic concepts of IoT Understand
CO2 Apply the knowledge of IoT to develop commercial applications Apply
Apply the knowledge of Raspberry Pi in IoT system

CO3 Apply
management.
Apply the concept of IoT using python for different Mobile Application
CO4 Apply
Analyze the various performance parameter for developing IoT

CO5 Analyze
applications
CO6 Design an IoT based real time applications Create

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajesh Singh, Anita Gehlot, Lovi Raj Gupta, Bhupendra Singh, and Mahendra wain,
“Internet of things with Raspberry pi and Arduino”, 2020 by CRC Press Taylor & Francis
Group, 2020.
2. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga,” Internet of Things A Hands-On- Approach”, 2014
3. IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of
Things, David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome
Henry, Cisco Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Parikshit N. Mahalle & Poonam N. Railkar, “Identity Management for Internet of Things”,
River Publishers, ISBN: 978-87-93102-90-3 (Hard Copy), 978-87-93102- 91-0 (ebook).
2. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand,
David Boyle,“From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things”, ISBN 9780124076846,
Academic Press 2014.
3. Daniel Minoli, “Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of
M2M Communications”, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications
Course Designer : R.Abdul sikkandar, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO

CO PO1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CAM
2.7 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.7
(AVG)
L T P C
21UEC504 ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the various parameters of an antenna.
● To impart knowledge on aperture antennas and frequency independent antennas.
● To gain knowledge on Radio Wave Propagation.
UNIT 1 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Antenna Parameters: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Return loss, VSWR- Directivity,
Gain, Input impedance -Polarization, Bandwidth Reciprocity -Equivalence Radiation Pattern,
Equivalence of Impedances -Effective aperture -Vector effective length - Antenna temperature -
Friss transmission equation
UNIT 2 WIRE ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA ARRAYS 9

Wire antennas: Hertizian dipole -Half wave Dipole, Radiation resistance and Directivity -
Monopole -Radiation resistance and Directivity -Small loop antennas -Antenna Arrays: Linear
Array -Pattern Multiplication -Two element array -Uniform Array with non- uniform Excitation-.
Binomial Array
UNIT 3 APERTURE ANTENNAS 9
Magnetic current and its fields -Uniqueness theorem -Field equivalence principle -Slot antenna -
Horn Antenna, Pyramidal Horn Antenna -Reflector Antenna-Flat reflector - Corner Reflector -
Common curved reflector shapes -, Lens Antenna
UNIT 4 SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS 9
Special Antennas: Yagi-Uda Antenna, Helical Antenna – Axial mode helix, Normal mode helix -
Log -periodic dipole array -Spiral antenna, Microstrip patch antenna - Wearable antennas,
Mobile phone antenna -Introduction to software related to antennas-Antenna Measurements :
Radiation Pattern measurement -Gain and Directivity Measurements- Anechoic Chamber
measurement- RF Safety Precautions.
UNIT 5 RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION 9

. Ground Wave Propagation -Free-space Propagation, Ground Reflection-Surface waves,
Diffraction-Wave propagation in complex Environments.-Tropospheric Propagation,
Tropospheric Scatter -Ionospheric propagation, Structure of Ionosphere - Sky waves, Skip
distance, Virtual height, Critical frequency, MUF-Electrical properties of ionosphere, Effects of
earth„s magnetic fields -Faraday rotation, Whistlers
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the fundamental characteristics of antenna and wave
CO1 propagation Understand
Apply the knowledge of antennas to calculate the basic
CO2 Apply
antenna parameters
Apply the knowledge of wave propagation to determine the
CO3 radiation characteristics Apply
Analyze the parameters of various antennas for the given

CO4 Analyze
specification
Evaluate the performance of the given antenna for different
CO5 substrates using simulation software. Evaluate
Design antennas for the given specification using simulation

CO6 Apply
software.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. K.D Prasad, ―Antennas and Wave Propagation‖, SathyaPrakasan Publications, 4 th

Edition,2009.
2. Constantine A. Balanis, ―Antenna Theory Analysis and Design, John Wiley
India‖, 4thEdition, 2016.
3. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, ―Electromagnetic waves and
Radiating systems‖,Pearson Education,2015.
REFERENCES:
1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J.Marhefka and Ahmad S.Khan ―Antennas and

wave propagation‖ TataMCGraw-Hill Book company,4 th Edition,2010
2. G.S.N.Raju, ―Antenna Wave Propagation‖, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. A .R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, ―Antennas and wave propagation ―Oxford

University Press, Ist Edition,2007
4. Wearableantennahttps://www.researchgate.net/publication/224089551_A_review_of_
wearableantenna
Course Designer :Dr. T.Venkatesh kanna

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
CO6 3 2 2 3 3
CAM
3 3 2.5 2.5 2 2 2 2 2
(Avg)
3- Strong 2- Medium 1- Weak

L T P C
21UGS531 REASONING AND APTITUDE
1 0 0 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To make the student acquire sound knowledge of the characteristic of
quantitative and qualitative aptitude.
● To familiarize the student with various principles involved in solving
mathematical problems.
● To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of reasoning skills
Unit – I QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE
Ratio and Proportion - Averages –Percentages – Problems on ages – Profit and Loss – Simple
and Compound Interest -– Time – Speed –Distance -Time and Work – Permutation and
Combination - Alligation or Mixture – Probability – Clocks – Calendars.
Unit – II VERBAL AND NON VERBAL REASONING
Analytical Reasoning – Circular and Linear arrangement – Direction problems – Blood relations
– Analogy – OddManOut – VennDiagrams- Data Sufficiency – Data
interpretation –– Syllogism - Coding –Decoding.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Select an appropriate technique to solve the quantitative
CO1 Apply
problems within the stipulated time
Apply Verbal and Non Verbal Reasoning skills to solve the Apply
CO2
problems based on the logical and analytical reasoning
Analyze the direction to solve equations involving one are Analyze
CO3 more unknowns
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dr. R.S.AGARWAL, ―Quantitative Aptitude‖,S. Chand Publications, New Delhi, 20th
Edition,(2013).
2. ABIJITGUHA,―QuantitativeAptitudeforCompetitiveExaminations‖,TataMcGraw Hill
Publication, New Delhi, 4th Edition,(2011).
3. R.V.Praveen,―QuantitativeAptitudeandReasoning‖,PHILearningPvt.Ltd.,Delhi, 2nd
Edition,(2013).
REFERENCES:
1. ASHISHAGGARWAL,―QuickArithmetic‖,S.ChandPublications,NewDelhi,6thRev ised
Edition,(2014).
2. Dr.V.A.SATHGURUNATH„S ―A Guide for Campus Recruitment‖, Sagarikka
Publications, Thiruchirapalli, 3rd Edition,(2011).
WEBSITES:
www.m4maths.com, www.indiabix.com, www.fresherworld.com,
www.campusgate.co.in,www.indianstudyhub.in, www.tcyonline.com.
MICROPROCESSOSRS, MICROCONTROLLERS AND L T P C
21UEC505 APPLICATIONS LAB
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop knowledge in assembly language programming with microprocessor and
microcontrollers.
● To give knowledge in various peripheral interfacing with microprocessor and
microcontrollers.
● To introduce modern tools for programming the microprocessor and
microcontroller.
Programming with 8086 and 8051
1. Arithmetic operations (in 8086 and 8051)
2. Logical Operations (in 8086 and 8051).
3. Array processing And Matrix operations (in 8086 kit and MASM).
4. String Manipulations (in 8086 kit and MASM).
5. Interfacing with 8255 PPI.
6. 8279 Keyboard & display using 8086.
7. ADC and DAC using 8086.
8. Stepper Motor Control using 8051
Programming with Arduino uno
1. To make a switch to control LED

2. Interfacing with various sensors (Motion, Smoke, humidity, color, distance)
3. Serial Communication between Node MCU and Arduino
4. Transferring Data from One Arduino to Another
5. Add WiFi to Arduino UNO
6. Stepper motor Control
Project based Learning

Mini project: Any application using Node MCU, Arduino uno and MASM, EMU 8086.
Course Designer : Ms.S.Ramya
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the programming knowledge of microprocessor and
CO1 Apply
microcontroller to perform various functions
Interface peripheral devices with microprocessor and
CO2 Apply
microcontroller to develop applications
Develop applications using modern tools like Arduino uno IDE and
CO3 Create
MASM
CO4 Apply
physical quantities
CO6 Organize
given task
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 3 - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 - 3
CO5 3 3 3 - - - - 3 2 - 3
CO6 3 3 - - - - 3 2 - 2
CAM 3 3 2.7 - - - - 3 2 2 2.33

(Avg)

L T P C
21UEC506 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To demonstrate signal processing techniques using DSP processor
● To demonstrate signal processing functions using Simulation Software.
Using Simulation Software:
1. Linear convolution between two sequences.

2. Circular convolution between two sequences.
3. Linear convolution using circular convolution.
4. Program to perform N-point DFT. Also to perform the IDFT on the result obtained to verify the
result.
5. Linear convolution using (a) overlap save method (b) overlap add method.
6. Perform FFT on a sequence using the following methods. (a) Decimation in time (b)
Decimation in frequency.
7. Design an Butterworth/ Chebychev IIR filter using impulse invariant method.
8. Design an Butterworth/ Chebychev IIR filter using bilinear transformation method.
9. Design an FIR filter using windowing techniques.
Using Digital Signal Processor:

10. Study of various addressing modes of DSP using simple programming examples
11. Implementation of Linear Convolution using Digital Signal Processor
12. Implementation of Circular Convolution using Digital Signal Processor
13. Waveform generation using Digital Signal Processor
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop various DSP Algorithms using Simulation
CO1 Apply
Software.
Analyze the frequency response characteristics of digital
CO2 Analyze
FIR and IIR filters.
Implement the DSP algorithms in digital
CO3 Apply
signal processor.
Apply appropriate software tools to make measurements
CO4 Apply
of physical quantities.
Function effectively as an individual for efficiently
CO6 Organize
executing the given task
Course Designer : Mr.A.Nagaraj
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 3 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 - - - - 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3
CO6 3 - - - 2 2
CAM 3 3 3 3 - - 3 2.4 2 2.5

(Avg)

L T P C
21UEC507 CREATIVE THINKING AND INNOVATION
0 0 2 1
PREAMBLE:
Creativity is vital in nearly every industry and occupation. Creativity and innovation are key to generation
of new ideas and methods of improving goods and services for customer satisfaction. This course
enhances the creative thinking and innovation skills of the students. Being creative helps one to be a
better problem solver in all areas of life and work.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To develop next generation Entrepreneurs and Creative Leaders to resolve live

challenges.
● To transform innovative ideas into successful businesses
● To use a range of creative thinking tools to develop Out of the Box Ideas
Course Content
Introduction to Creativity and Innovation- Creative Techniques - Problem Identification through Brain
Storming - Solution Identification through Creative Techniques - Presentation on the Innovative Idea -
Market Analysis - Revenue and Business Model - Preparation of promotional aids - Customer
Feedback Analysis.
List of Activities
Duration What does the Faculty do? What do the students do?
Explains creativity and Team Formation
Week 1
Innovation (Team Size: 3)
Explains the Creative Discovering Consumer Need through

Techniques (Through Video / Need Analysis (Customer Segment)
Week 2
Presentation )
Problem Identification through brain

Week 3 Facilitates the brain storming
storming
Identify the solution for the chosen

Facilitates problem solving problem through creative techniques
Week 4
Presentation on the Innovative

Week 5 Evaluates the presentation
Idea and Value Proposition
Week 6 Evaluates the presentation Presentation on the Innovative

Idea and Value Proposition
Explains about the Market
Week 7 Research / Competitor Analysis, Market Analysis after the
Revenue Model and explanation
Business Model
Preparation of Innovation
Week 8 Development Plan, Business
Facilitates the students work Development Plan and Financial
Plan
Week 9 Facilitates the students work Preparing product promotional
material
Week 10 Facilitates the students work Improvement through Feedback
Total Hours: 30 Periods
Assessment Pattern
1. Internal Assessment: Presentation on the Innovative Idea

2. End Semester Assessment:
o Submission of Business Plan
o Presentation on My Startup Idea (Evaluator : From Industry)
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to:
CO1 Demonstrate the ability to assess societal, health and safety Valuing –
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the Affective
professional engineering practice Domain
CO2 Examine impact on environment and society in the proposed innovative Organization
idea and provide solutions for sustainable – Affective
development Domain
CO3 Adapt themselves to work in a group as a member or a leader for Organization
efficiently executing the given task – Affective
Domain
21UGT140 HERITAGE OF TAMIL L T P C
1 0 0 1
UNITI LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language -Classical Literature in
Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature
- Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil Land
- Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry-Development of Modern
literature inTamil-Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan
UNITII HERITAGE-ROCKART PAINTINGSTO MODERN ART– 3

SCULPTURE
Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car making-
Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari, Making of musical
instruments- Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazhand Nadhaswaram- Role of Temples in Social and
Economic Life of Tamils
UNIT III FOLKAND MARTIALARTS 3
Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam, Valari,
Tiger dance-Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNITIV THINAICONCEPT OFTAMILS 3
Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature- Aram
Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age – Ancient Cities and Ports of Sangam Age-
Export and Import during Sangam Age-Overseas Conquest Of Cholas
UNITV CONTRIBUTIONOFTAMILS TOINDIANNATIONALMOVEMENT 3

ANDINDIANCULTURE
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle-The Cultural Influence of Tamils over

the other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine–Inscriptions& Manuscripts– Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL:15PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS CUMREFERENCES:
SEMESTER VI
SEMESTER VI
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
1. 21UEC601 Wireless Communication PC 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC602 VLSI Design PC 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC603 Image Processing and Analysis ES 3 0 0 3
4. PE - II Professional Elective – II PE 3 0 0 3
5. PE - III Professional Elective – III PE 3 0 0 3
6. OE - II Open Elective – II OE 3 0 0 3
Laboratory Courses
7. 21UEC607 Product Development Project PW 0 0 8 4
8. 21UEC608 VLSI Design Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1
Soft skills and Communication Laboratory

9. 21UGS632 (common to ECE, Mechanical, Civil, HSS 0 0 2 1
BME, BT)
Mandatory Course
Indian Constitution (Common to ALL

10. 21UGM631 MC 1 0 0 P/F
Branches)
Total 19 0 12 24
Total Credits : 24
L T P C
21UEC601 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge on the characteristics of wireless channels and various cellular
architectures.
● To introduce the concepts behind various digital signaling schemes for fading channels
● To familiarize the various multipath mitigation techniques and wireless system standards
Unit – 1 INTRODUCTION TO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION & 8
CELLULAR CONCEPT
Introduction to Wireless Communication - Cellular concept- Frequency reuse- Channel
assignment Strategies-Hand off Strategies- Interference & system capacity- Trunking and Grade
of Service- Improving Coverage and Capacity in Cellular Systems
Unit – 2 MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION 10
Introduction to Radio Wave Propagation, Free Space Propagation model, Relating Power to
Electric Field, The Three Basic Propagation Mechanisms, Ground Reflection (Two- Ray) Model,
Diffraction, Scattering, Practical Link Budget Design Using Path Loss Models, Indoor and Outdoor
Propagation models, Small-Scale Multipath Propagation- Impulse Response Model of a Multipath
Channel, Small-Scale Multipath Measurements, Parameters of Mobile Multipath Channels-Types
of Small- Scale Fading
Unit – 3 DIGITAL SIGNALING FOR FADING CHANNELS 9

Linear Modulation Techniques – Constant Envelope Modulation- Combined Linear and Constant
Envelope Modulation Techniques- Spread Spectrum Modulation Techniques- Modulation
Performance in Fading and Multipath Channels
Unit – 4 MULTIPATH MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 9

Introduction, Fundamentals of Equalization-Training A Generic Adaptive Equalizer – Equalizers in
a Communications Receiver- Survey of Equalization Techniques-Linear Equalizers-Nonlinear
Equalization-Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization- Diversity Techniques-RAKE Receiver-
Interleaving
Unit – 5 ADVANCEMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9
Bluetooth and IEEE 802.15 376– Cellular Wireless Networks- Fourth Generation Systems and
LTE- Advanced- Requirements of 5G-5G standards-Impact of radiations in 4G & 5G- Millimeter
Wave Technology- Cognitive Radio- Long Range Communications-WiMAX- Smart Grid- NB-
IoT-
LoraWAN
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamental concepts of wireless communication
CO1 Understand
systems
Apply the knowledge of cellular concept to compute the parameters of

CO2 Apply
cellular services
Apply the knowledge of channel characteristics to compute the

CO3 Apply
different parameters of multipath channels
Apply the knowledge of digital filter to design Equalizers for the given
CO4 Apply
specifications
CO5 Apply the knowledge of 4G and 5G in real time applications. Apply
Analyze the error performance of various signaling schemes for

CO6 Analyze
fading channels
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rappaport,T.S., “Wireless communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Cory.Beard,William Stallings, “Wireless Communication Network and Systems”,
Pearson Education, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless communications: principles and practice”, second edition,
PHI,2006.
2. William C.Y.Lee, “Wireless and Cellular communications, Third Edition, Tata Mc- Graw
Hill, 2006.
3. David Tse and PramodViswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. UpenaDalal, “ Wireless Communication”, Oxford University Press, 2009.
5. Jonathan Rodriguez, “Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks” Wiley Publications, 2015.
Course Designer : Mrs.R.Devika, AP/ECE

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - 2 - - - - - 2 2
CO2 3 - 2 - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 - 2 - - - 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 - - - 3 2 2
CO6 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 3
CAM 2. 3 3 2 2 2 - - 3 2 2
(Avg) 8
3

L T P C
21UEC602 VLSI DESIGN
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the basic concepts of CMOS Technologies and testing
● To outline the formal procedures for the design of combinational and sequential
circuits
UNIT1 INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL 9
VLSI Circuit Design Flow- Hierarchical modeling concepts-Basic concepts-Gate level
modeling- Dataflow modeling- Behavioral modeling-Design examples of
Combinational and Sequential circuits.
UNIT2 CMOS TECHNOLOGY 9

MOS Transistor theory -I-V Characteristics-C-V Characteristics-Non -Ideal I-V
Characteristics-DC Transfer characteristics-CMOS Technology-Layout design rule
UNIT3 CIRCUITS CHARACTERIZATION 9

Delay estimation-Logical effort and Transistor sizing-Power dissipation-Interconnect- Design
Margin-Reliability-Scaling
UNIT4 CMOS LOGIC STRUCTURES AND SUBSYSTEM DESIGN 9

Static CMOS logic Design-Dynamic CMOS logic Design-Circuit families-Circuit design
Of latches and flip-flop –Adder circuits-Ripple carry adder-Carry look ahead adder-
High speed adder-Multiplier
UNIT5 LOW-POWER CMOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Overview of Power Consumption, Low-Power Design Through Voltage Scaling, Estimation and
Optimization of Switching Activity, Reduction of Switched Capacitance and Adiabatic
Logic Circuits
TOTAL:45PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Describe the concepts of MOS transistor technology
CO1 Understand
Design the different CMOS logic using MOS transistor

CO2 Apply
Design the layouts for various logic circuits

CO3 Apply
Analyze the various characteristics of MOS transistor

CO4 Analyze
Analyze the various techniques for MOS transistor optimization

CO5 Analyze
Design a combinational and sequential MOS circuits using

CO6 suitable programming languages Create
TEXTBOOKS:
1. SamirPalnitkar―VerilogHDLaguidetodigitaldesignandSynthesis‖,PrenticeHall,2ndedit ion,
2003
2. WesteandHarris:CMOSVLSIDESIGN(fourthedition)PearsonEducation,2013
3. JohnP.Uyemura,―Introduction to VLSI Circuits and systems‖,John Wiley &Sons, Reprint
2009
REFERENCES:
4. Neil H.E Weste & Kamaran Eshraghian, Principles of CMOS
VLSIDesign,2ndEdition,PearsonEducation,2010
5. JanRabaey.M,DigitalIntegratedCircuits:AdesignPerspective,secondEditionfifthrepri
ntPrenticeHall2002..
6. Pucknell.D.A&K.EshraghianBasicVLSIDesign,Thirdedition,PHI,2003.
7. David A. Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design” John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
1997.
Course Designer : Mr.D.John Pragasam, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 3 3 3 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 2 3
CO.5 3 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CAM 2.83 3 2.5 3 3 2 2.5

(Avg)

L T P C
21UEC603 IMAGE PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To explain the basic concepts of digital image processing.
● To impart knowledge on image enhancement and segmentation techniques.
● To get exposed to the fundamentals of machine learning concepts and its application in
computer vision.
Unit – 1 IMAGE FORMATION AND IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Introduction and Goals of Computer Vision, Fundamentals of Image Processing, Image Formation and
Radiometry, Geometric Transformation, Geometric Camera Model, Image Reconstruction from a series of
Projections
Unit – 2 IMAGE PROCESSING CONCEPTS 9

Image Enhancement techniques: Point, Geometric, and Spatial Operations, Image Transforms: DFT, DCT,
KL, Wavelet, Ridgelet, Contourlet Transform, Image Filtering: Spatial domain filtering, Frequency domain
filtering, Homomorphic filtering and Wiener Filtering for image restoration
Unit – 3 IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND FEATURES 10
Morphological operations: Binary, Grayscale, and Distance Transform, Image Segmentation:
Thresholding, Region-based segmentation, Edge detection- based segmentation; Deformable models
form image segmentation, Image Descriptors and Features: Texture Descriptors, Color Features, Edge
detection, Object boundary and shape representation, Scale Invariant Feature
Transform.
Unit – 4 FUNDAMENTALS OF MACHINE LEARNING CONCEPTS: PATTERN 9
RECOGNITION
Introduction to Pattern Recognition, Linear Regression and Decision theory, Parameter Estimation and
Dimension Reduction, Artificial Neural Network for Pattern Classification,
Convolutional Neural Networks.
Unit – 5 APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTER VISION 8
Machine Learning Algorithms and Their Applications in Medical Image Segmentation, Face and Facial
Expression Recognition, Gesture Recognition, Simulation Examples.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
State the fundamental concepts and transform domain operations
CO1 Understand
associated with digital image processing.
Apply the mathematical concepts to enhance and compress to
CO2 Apply
improve the quality of images.
Simulate machine learning based pattern recognition algorithms
CO3 Apply
using modern engineering tools.
CO4 Analyze and utilize different image segmentation techniques. Analyze
Analyze different machine learning techniques used for pattern
CO5 Analyze
recognition.
Evaluate the performance of various machine learning algorithms used in
CO6 Evaluate
computer vision applications.
Text Books:
1. Manas Kamal Bhuyan, “Computer Vision and Image Processing: Fundamentals and Applications,”
CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, 2020
2. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, ”Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision,”
Cengage Learning, Fourth Edition, 2015
References:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard. E. Woods, ”Digital Image Processing,” Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Anil K.Jain, ”Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing,” Pearson Education,2003.
3. Kenneth R. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing,” Pearson, 2006.
4. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing,” John Wiley, New York, 2002
Course Designer : Dr.K.A.SHAHUL HAMEED, Prof/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 2
CO.2 3 2 2
CO.3 3 2 2 2
CO.4 3 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 2 2 2
CO.6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CAM 2.83 2.6 2 2 2 2 2

(Avg)

L T P C
21UEC607 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
0 0 8 4
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop competency with a set of tools and methods for product design,
manufacturing and marketing functions in creating a new product.
Project Description:
Product development is the process of delivering a new product or improving and existing product for
customers. This course helps students to convert an idea into a product. Eight periods per week will be
allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the students to receive directions from the guide,
for library reading, laboratory work, computer analysis and field work as assigned by the guide. There
shall be periodical seminar presentations about the progress made in the project. The progress of the
project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews.
TOTAL : 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design and develop sustainable innovative solutions for societal issues with Create -
CO1 consideration for public health, safety and environment. Cognitive
Domain
Analyze -
CO2 Analyze the market potential and evolve the product strategy Cognitive
Domain
Apply modern engineering and IT tools, algorithms, techniques to Apply -

CO3 Cognitive
provide valid conclusion following the norms of engineering
Domain
Practice
Test and evaluate the performance of the developed innovative Evaluate-
CO4 Cognitive
product using appropriate techniques and tools
Domain
Organize effectively as a team for executing the project Organize -
CO5 Affective
Domain
Write effective reports and make clear presentations Respond -
CO6 Affective
Domain
L T P C
21UEC608 VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY
0 0 3 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To implement Verilog coding for combinational and sequential circuits
● To provide the knowledge of synthesis, simulation andgeneration of configuration file
for combinational and sequential circuits
LISTOFEXPERIMENTS:
1. Design and simulation of adder(min8bit).
2. Design and simulation of Multiplexer and demultiplexer.
3. Design and simulation of multiplier(min4bit).
4. Design and simulation of ALU.
5. Design and simulation of flip-flop.
6. Design and simulation of Universal shift register.
7. Design and simulation of finite state machine.
8. Design and simulation of counter.
9. Simulate minimum dimension of CMOS inverter, NAND, NOR and XOR circuits
10. Design and simulation of Static CMOS and Dynamic CMOS circuits.
11. Design and simulation of differential amplifier.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
CO1 Design and Simulate digital circuits using VLSI Software Apply
Design and implement combinational and sequential circuit using
CO2 FPGA. Apply
Develop verilog code for real time applications.

CO3 Create
CO4 Apply
physical quantities
Demonstrate proficiency in using discipline-specific tools
CO5 Apply
CO6 Organize
given task
Course Designer : Mr.D.John Pragasam, AP/ECE

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 3 - - - - 2 - 2
CO2 3 - - - - 2 - 2
CO3 3 3 - - - - 2 - 3
CO4 3 - - - - 2 - 3
CO5 3 - - - - 2 - 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - 2
CAM 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - 2.5
(Avg)

SOFT SKILLS AND COMMUNICATION LABORATORY L T P C
21UGS632
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop a requisite knowledge in Communication skills and Softskills.
● To enhance the students„ acumen in honing the skills to meet the Global changes and
Industrialneeds.
Unit – 1 SPEAKING SKILLS

Conversational Skills - Self Introduction - Group Discussion - Public Speaking - Presentation Skills
Unit – 2 WRITING SKILLS

Letter Writing – Report Writing – Email Writing – Job Application – Resume Preparation
Unit – 3 READING AND LISTENING SKILLS

Reading Comprehension – Enriching Vocabulary – Error Spotting – Listening and Note Taking
Unit – 4 SOFTSKILLS
Professional Ethics – Interpersonal Skills – Stress Management – Leadership Qualities – Time
Management – Conflict Resolution
Unit – 5 INTERVIEW SKILLS
Types of Interview – Body Language – Professional Grooming – Basic Etiquette
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Answer the queries precisely after carefully listening to the
CO1 conversation or speech.(Affective domain - Responding) Responding
Communicate orally with fluency and clarity in a given Responding

CO2
contextual situation (Affective domain - Responding)
Debate with clarity of thought and expression to convey their ideas Valuing
CO3
politely to others (Affective domain - Valuing)
CO4 Apply correct usage of English grammar in writing, fluent speaking and Apply
comprehending. (Cognitive Domain - Apply)
REFERENCES:
4. Skills for Success, Listening and Speaking – Level 4 by Brooks and Margret – Oxford
University Press, Oxford 2011Edition.
5. Professional Communication by Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeetha Sharma – Oxford
University Press, 2014Edition.
6. Developing Soft Skills by Sherfield, Robert M, R J Montgomery and Patricia G Moody
– Pearson EducationPublishers.
L T P C
21UGM631 INDIAN CONSTITUTION
1 - - P/F
OBJECTIVES:
● The students will be exposed to fundamental rights & duties in Indian Constitution.
● The students will be given knowledge on the components of the parliamentary system
to prepare for the process of their career development.
● The student will have knowledge on powers and functions of Local bodies and Indian polity to
appear for various competitive exams such as UPSC, TNPSC and RRB
● The student will know about the functions of judiciary and electoral process followed
in the country.
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION ON INDIAN CONSTITUTION

Preamble - Salient features of the Constitution of India. Fundamental Rights - its restriction and limitations
in different Complex Situations. Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP) - Fundamental Duties: its
Scope and significance in Nation building - Constitution components: schedule, parts and articles of
constitution- important
Amendments of constitution.
UNIT 2 PARLIAMENTARY SYSTEM

Parliamentary System – parliamentary system of other countries - Indian parliamentary system- Federal
System – LS and RS, Centre-State Relations-Election of member of parliaments- Union Executive -
President, Prime Minister, Union Cabinet. State
Legislature -State Executives –election of MLA- Governor, Chief Minister, State Cabinet.
UNIT 3 JUDICIARY AND ELECTION COMMISSION

Supreme Court of India: Structure, Power and Functions of Supreme Court-Judicial Reviews - Judicial
Activism. High Court and Subordinate Courts: Structure, Power and Functions. – Lokadhalats. Elections-
Electoral Process - Election Commission of India -
Election Laws –Emergency Provisions - types of Emergencies and its consequences.
UNIT 4 LOCAL ADMINISTRATION

Local Administration: Powers and functions of Municipalities andPanchayats System-
PanchayatRaj- Co–operative Societies and Constitutional and Non-constitutional Bodies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply knowledge of the fundamental rights and duties prescribed by Indian
CO1 Constitution to prepare for various competitive examinations.
Manage complex societal issues in society with the knowledge of judiciary and local
CO2
administration.
Interpret the societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues with understanding of
CO3
parliamentary system and electoral process through self-learning skills.
Understand the ethical responsibilities of Municipalities, Panchayats and co-
CO4 operative societies.
Understand and distinguish the functioning of the parliamentary system followed in various
CO5 countries.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shubham Singles, Charles E.Haries, et al.,―Constitution of India and Professional Ethics‖
by Cengage Learning India Private Limited,2018.
2. Subhash C. Kashyap,‖Our Constitution: An Introduction to India„s
Constitution and constitutional Law‖,NBT, 2018.
3. BrijKishoreSharma,―IntroductiontotheConstitutionofIndia‖,PHILearningPvt.Ltd.
,New Delhi,2011.
4. M.V.Pylee,―An Introduction to Constitution ofIndia‖,VikasPublishing,2002.
DurgaDasBasu,―Introduction to the Constitution on India‖,Prentice Hall, 2001.
SEMESTER VII
SEMESTER VII
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
Laboratory Courses
Mandatory Course
4. 21UGM831 MC 2 0 0 P/F
Total 8 0 16 14
Total Credits : 14
L T P C
21UME701 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND FINANCE
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge to find solutions and approaches for variousprojects.
● To familiarize the utilization of project within time, resource andfinancial
constraints
Unit – 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 9

Concept and characteristics of a project, importance of project management, typesof project, project
organizational structure, project life cycle, Statement of Work, Work Breakdown Structure.
Unit – 2 PROJECT PLANNING 9

Project Planning and Scheduling techniques - developing the project network using CPM/PERT,
Limitations of CPM/PERT, Precedence Diagramming Method, constructing diagram and computations
using precedence diagramming method, PERT/CPM
simulation, reducing project duration
Unit – 3 RESOURCE SCHEDULING & CRITICAL CHAIN SCHEDULING 9

Resource Scheduling - Resource allocation method, splitting and multitasking, Multi project resources
scheduling - Critical Chain Scheduling -Concept of critical chain scheduling - critical chain scheduling
method, application of Critical chain schedulingand
Limitations
Unit – 4 PROJECT QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of project quality, responsibility for quality in projects, quality management at different stages
of project, tools and techniques, Quality Management Systems, TQM in projects - Project Performance
Measurement and Control - Monitor and assess project performance, schedule, and cost.Earned Value
Management, performance measurement methods to monitor, evaluate and control planned cost and
schedule performance -
Project Closure/ Termination - Meaning of closure/ termination, project audit process, termination
steps, final closure.
Unit – 5 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - Financial Ratio
Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis – Comparative financial statements. Investments-
Average rate of return - Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze different types of projects and identify the suitable
CO1 Analyze
project for the given constraints
Analyze and identify Critical Path using PERT/CPM for the
CO2 Analyze
given project
Analyze Theory of Constraints, Multi project scheduling and
CO3 Analyze
heuristic methods for allocating resources to a project
Apply the knowledge of Quality Management and TQM Concepts to
CO4 different stages of project and design a suitable Quality Management Apply
System
Investigate the financial data such as balance sheet, income
CO5 expenditure statement, cash flow statement and budget to Analyze
interpret, synthesize to provide valid solution for a variety of
business problems
TEXT BOOKS:
4. PrasannaChandra,―'FundamentalsofFinancialManagement'‖,TataMcgraw-
HillPublishing Ltd,2005.
5. JackMeredith,SamuelJ.Mantel,―ProjectManagement-AManagerialApproach‖, John
Wiley andSons
REFERENCES:
8. Clifford F Gray, Erik W Larson, ―Project Management-The Managerial Process‖, Tata
Mcgraw-Hill Publishing CoLtd.
9. John M Nicholas, ―Project Management For Business And
Technology‖,PrenticeHall of India PvtLtd.
10. Paresh Shah, ―Basic Financial Accounting for Management‖, Oxford University
Press, 2007.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
P
CO O PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11
12 11 12
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3 2
CO5 3
CO6 2
CAM
Avg 3 2
3- Strong 2- Medium 1-Weak

L T P C
21UEC702 OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To learn the basic elements of optical fiber communication.
● To learn the principles and characteristics of various optical sources and receivers and
performance
● To study the characteristics of microwave tube Generators and Amplifiers.
● To understand MMICs and microwave measurements.
UNIT I OPTICAL RAY THEORY AND OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES 10
ntroduction, Ray theory transmission- Total Internal Reflection Acceptance angle, Numerical Aperture,
Types of fibers - Step index, graded index, single mode & multimode, Sources-LED & Laser Diode,
Detectors-Photodetectors- PN & PIN - Applications and simulation software of fiber optics in
communication.
UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPTICAL TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER 9
Attenuation – Material absorption losses in silica glass fibers – Linear and Nonlinear Scattering
losses - Fiber Bend Losses -Intra and inter Modal Dispersion Fundamental receiver operation,
Pre amplifiers, Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error – Quantum limit. Recent trends in
optical
communication.
UNIT III MICROWAVE DEVICES AND MICROWAVE TUBES 10
Microwave frequencies (IEEE Standards), Properties of S-parameters, S-matrix calculations of

E- plane, H-plane and Magic Tee, Directional Couplers, Microwave Circulators and Isolators,
Gunn Diodes-GaAs Diode- Reflex klystron- Traveling-Wave Tubes (TWTs)- Magnetron
Oscillators.
UNIT IV MONOLITHIC MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 8
Introduction, Definition, characteristics, comparison with conventional circuits, fields of application and
limitations and criteria for the choice of substrate material; Conductor Materials, Dielectric Materials,
Resistive Materials, Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit Growth, MMIC Fabrication Techniques-
Fabrication of microwave circuit.
UNIT V MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS AND APPLICATIONS 8
Microwave measurements - guide wavelength VSWR, frequency and impedance, practical

perspective of microwaves: Microwave oven, Radar, wireless applications, Electromagnetic
interference / Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMI / EMC).
TOTAL : 45 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion, the student will be able to
CO 1 Explain the concept of optical communication system. Understand
Compare the different fabrication techniques used to Understand

CO 2
construct microwave circuits.
Apply the fundamental principles of optics and light wave to Apply
CO 3
design optical fiber communication systems.
Apply the knowledge of optical characteristics to compute the Apply
CO 4
losses and error probability
Apply the knowledge of microwave devices for various microwave Apply
CO 5
applications.
CO 6 Analyze a microwave system for the given specifications. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, Tata McGraw-Hill India, 5th edition, 2017.
2. Senior John M., Optical Fiber Communications, Pearson Education India, 4th edition, 2014.
3. Samuel Y Liao,” Microwave devices and circuits”, Pearson Education India, 3rd edition 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber-optic communication systems”, John Wiley & sons, 5th
Edition,2021.
2. David M.Pozar,, ”Microwave Engineering” , John Wiley & Sons,, , IIEd,,4th edition , 2011.
3. Valeria Teppati, Andrea Ferrero, Mohamed Sayed, ,“ Modern RF and Microwave

Measurement Techniques”, Cambridge University Press,2013.
4. Annapurna Das, Sisir K. DAS, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th edition,2020.
Course Designer: Dr.M.Pandimadevi, ASP/ECE
Course Articulation Matrix:
CO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 12 PSO 1 PSO 2
CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2
CO6 3 2 2 2
CAM
Avg 2.67 2 2 2

OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION L T P C
21UEC708
LABORATORY
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To demonstrate the characteristics of Microwave sources

● To study the characteristics of Microwave Components
● To train the students about fiber optic components used in optical
communication.
MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS
1. Reflex Klystron–Mode characteristics
2. V-I characteristics of Gunn Diode
3. VSWR, Frequency and Wave Length Measurement
4. Directional Coupler – Directivity and Coupling Coefficient–S–parameter measurement
5. S-matrix Characterization of E-Plane Tee, H-Plane Tee
6. Radiation Pattern of Antennas.
7. Antenna Gain Measurement
OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS:
1. DC characteristics of LED
2. DC characteristics of Laser diode
3. Fiber Optic Analog and Digital Link
4. Determination of Numerical Aperture of optical fiber.
5. Losses in Fiber optic communication systems
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 Analyze the DC characteristic of Optical Sources. Analyze
Estimate the scattering parameters of Microwave

CO 2 Analyze
components.
Analyze various losses in fiber optic communication
CO 3 Analyze
system
Apply appropriate instrumentation tools to make

CO 4 Apply
measurements of physical Quantities.
Use appropriate procedure to conduct experiments and

CO 5 Apply
collect data.
Adapt themselves to work in a group as a member or a

CO 6 Organize
leader for efficiently executing the given task.
PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
1 10 11 12 11 12
CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 2
CO6
2 2 2
2
CAM
Avg 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

SEMESTER VIII
SEMESTER VIII
S. Course Course
No.
Theory Courses
Laboratory Courses
Mandatory Course
4. 21UGM831 MC 2 0 0 P/F
Total 8 0 16 14
Total Credits : 14
L T P C
21UEC801 PROJECTWORK
0 0 16 8
OBJECTIVES:
● To deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to a new problem which may be
the design and manufacture of a device, a research investigation, a
computer based project or management project.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
Sixteen periods per week shall be allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the
students to receive the directions from the guide, on library reading, laboratory work, computer
analysis or field work as assigned by the guide and also to present in periodical seminars on the
progress made in the project. The progress of the project is evaluated
based on a minimum of three reviews.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design/Develop sustainable solutions for societal issues with
CO1 environmental considerations applying the basic engineering Create
knowledge
Analyze and review research literature to synthesize research methods

CO2 Analyze
including design of experiments toprovide valid conclusion
Utilize the new tools, algorithms, techniques to provide valid conclusion

CO3 Apply
following the norms of engineering practice
Test and Evaluate the performance of the developedsolution using

CO4 Evaluate
appropriate techniques and tools
Apply management principles to function effectively in the project team for Affective
CO5
project execution Domain
Engage in learning for effective project implementation in the broadest

Affective
context of technological change with consideration for public health, safety,
CO6 Domain
cultural andsocietal needs.
Write effective reports and make clear presentation to the Psycho

CO7
engineering community and society motor
Domain
L T P C
21UGM831 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & HUMAN VALUES
2 0 0 P/F
OBJECTIVES:
● To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human

Values to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of
others
UNIT 1 HUMAN VALUES 7
Morals- Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethic – Service Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for
Others – Living Peacefully – caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage - Valuing Time - Co-operation –
Commitment – Empathy- self-Confidence –Character
UNIT 2 ENGINEERING ETHICS 7
Senses of „Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy –
Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues –Uses of Ethical Theories.
UNIT 3 UNIVERSAL HARMONY 4
Engineering Harmony in the family – Harmony in the society – Trust and Respect – Universal
harmonious order
UNIT 4 SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 6
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest
– Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.
UNIT 5 GLOBAL ISSUES 6
Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role in

Technological Development– Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Honesty – Moral
Leadership – Sample Code of Conduct.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply ethics in society, discuss the ethical issues related to Apply
engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the
society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering

Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics
– Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
4. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2003
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for
Personal Integrity and Social Responsibility” McGraw Hill education, India Pvt.
Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, „ Value Education‟, Vethathiri
publications, Erode, 2011.

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 11 12
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3 2
CO5 3
CO6 2
CAM
Avg 3 2 2

Course
S.No Code Course Title L T P C
Vertical I – 21ECV100-Signal Processing
1. 21ECV101 Adaptive Signal processing and Applications 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV102 Speech and Audio Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV103 Video Processing and Analysis 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV104 Bio Medical Signal & Image Processing 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV105 DSP Processor Architecture 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV106 Software Defined and Cognitive Radio 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV107 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV1N01 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3

L T P C
21ECV101 ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING AND
APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce practical aspects of adaptive signal processing in particular adaptive
systems.
● To know the current applications for adaptive systems
● T know the basic principles of adaptation, will cover various adaptive signal processing
algorithms and many applications, such as adaptive noise cancellation, interference
canceling, system identification, etc.
UNIT I Introduction to Adaptive Systems 9

Definitions, Characteristics, Applications, Example of an Adaptive System. The Adaptive
Linear Combiner - Description, Weight Vectors, Desired Response, Performance function -
Gradient
Theory of Adaption with stationary signals and Gradient
UNIT II 9
search methods
Normal form of the input correlation matrix, Eigen values and Eigen vectors of the input correlation
matrix, geometrical significance of Eigen vectors, Steepest Descent Algorithms: Gradient Search by
Newton’s Method, Method of Steepest Descent,.
UNIT III Linear Prediction And Adaptive Filters 9
Linear prediction – forward & backward filters -solution of normal equations -AR Lattice and ARMA
Lattice -Ladder Filters, Wiener Filters for Filtering and Prediction -Adaptive Filters - Gradient
Adaptive Lattice -Minimum mean square criterion
UNIT IV Adaptive Modeling 9

Adaptive Modeling of a multipath communication channel- Adaptive modeling in geophysical
exploration- General description of Inverse Modeling, Adaptive equalization of telephone channels,
Adaptive Interference canceller as a notch filter and high pass filter
UNIT V Adaptive arrays and adaptive beam forming 9
Side lobe cancellation, beam forming with a pilot signal, spatial configurations, adaptive
algorithms, performance characteristics of receiving arrays, the Griffiths LMS beam former, The
frost adaptive beam former , signal cancellation and distortion
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamentals of adaptive signals and systems
CO1 Understand
Design a linear adaptive filters using efficient algorithms Apply
CO2
Apply mathematical models for error performance and Apply
CO3 stability.
Apply adaptive modeling techniques for real time Apply

CO4 applications
Analyze signals and develop their statistical models for Analyze
CO5 efficient processing
Analyze various parameters of signals with different Analyze
CO6 constraints
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.G.Proakis and D.G.Manolakis “Digital signal processing: Principles, Algorithm and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2014.
2. M. H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Optimu
m signal processing: An introduction - Sophocles.J.Orfamadis, 5th Ed.,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 2010.
2. Adaptive signal processing-Theory and Applications - S.Thomas Alexander,
Springer, Verlag.2018
3. S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
4. D.G.Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M.Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2018.
Course Designer: Dr.M.Fathu Nisha, AsP\ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 -
CO6 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 - 3 -
CAM 2.8 1 1 0.6 0.3 - - - - - 0.6 - 2.3 -

(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV102 SPEECH AND AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the basic concepts of speech.
 To discuss the analysis features of speech.
 To familiarize Speech quantization and coding.
 To explain the speech processing applications.
MODULE 1 Introduction 9
Basics of speech production- LTI model, LTV model, voiced and unvoiced decision making, speech
parameters, pitch and formants, pitch frequency measurement using AMDF and autocorrelation,
Parallel processing approach, pitch period measurement using spectral domain, cepstral domain,
relation between formants and LPC, evaluation of formants using cepstrum, log spectrum and Power
spectral density estimate.
MODULE 2 Time Domain models for Speech Processing 9
Time Domain models for Speech Processing: Introduction – Window considerations, Short time
energy, average magnitude, average zero crossing rate, Speech vs Silence discrimination using
energy and zero crossing, pitch period estimation using a parallel processing approach, the short
time autocorrelation function, average magnitude difference function, pitch period estimation using
the autocorrelation function.
MODULE 3 Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) Analysis 9
Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) Analysis : Basic principles of Linear Predictive Analysis : The
Autocorrelation Method, The Covariance method, Solution of LPC Equations : Cholesky
Decomposition Solution for Covariance Method, Durbin’s Recursive Solution for the Autocorrelation
Equations, comparison between the methods of solution of the LPC Analysis
Equations, Applications of LPC Parameters : Pitch Detection using LPC Parameters, Formant
Analysis using LPC Parameters.
MODULE 4 Homomorpic & Automatic Speech Recognition 9
Homomorpic speech analysis : Definition of the ceptstrum and complex ceptstrum,short time
ceptstrum, homomorphic filtering of speech, Application: pitch detection-pattern recognition. Automatic
Speech Recognition: problem of automatic speech recognizer, building a speech recognition system,
decision recognition system, decision process in ASR, representation recognition
performance ,challenges in ASR technology.
MODULE 5 Audio Coding 9
Audio Coding : Lossless Audio Coding, Lossy Audio coding, Psychoacoustics , ISO-MPEG-1 Audio
coding , MPEG- 2 Audio coding, MPEG - 2 Advanced Audio Coding, MPEG - 4 Audio Coding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Text Books:
1. “Digital Processing of Speech Signals” L.R. Rabiner and S. W. Schafer. Pearson
Education. 2003 (Module 2 and 3))
2. “Introduction to Digital speech processing” Lawrence R.Rabiner and Ronald
W.Schafer. Foundation and Trends in signal processing, 2007 (Module 4)
3. “Digital Audio Signal Processing” Udo Zolzer, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2008 (Module 5)
4. Dr.Shaila D Apte- “Speech and audio processing”, Wiley India Publication, 2019
(Module1)
Reference Books:
1. “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing” Principles and Practice - Thomas F.
Quateri, 1st Ed., Pearson Education, 2002.
2. “Speech & Audio Signal Processing” Ben Gold & Nelson Morgan, Wiley -Indian Edition, 2006.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course the students will be able to :
Understand the basic concept of speech signals ,speech

CO1 production, speech analysis, speech coding and parameter Understand
representation of speech
Develop linear predictive coding algorithm for speech signal and Apply
CO2 extract the LPC coefficient used to synthesis or compress the
speech.
Apply speech coding and enhancement algorithms on speech Apply
CO3 signals.
Develop MATLAB code for processing audio and speech Apply
CO4 signals.
Analyze the speech in time domain and various coding Analyze
CO5 technique to extract various parameters
Create
Design basic audio coding methods using existing code
CO6
Course Designer: Mr.N.Sathiyanthan, AP / ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO5 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO6 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - 2
CAM 2.5 2.4 2.3 - 2.5 - - - - - - - 2

(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV103 VIDEO PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To have a better knowledge about videos representation and its formats
 To know the fundamental concepts of data science and analytics
 To expose the student to emerging applications in video analytics
UNIT 1 VIDEO FUNDAMENTALS 9
Basic Concepts and Terminology – Analog Video Standards – Digital Video Basics – Analog- to
Digital Conversion – Color Representation and Chroma SubSampling – Video Sampling Rate and
Standards Conversion – Digital Video Formats –Video Features – Color, Shape and
Textural Features
UNIT II MOTION ESTIMATION AND VIDEO SEGMENTATION 9
Fundamentals of Motion Estimation – Optical Flow – 2D and 3D Motion Estimation – Block
Based Point Correspondences – Gradient Based Intensity Matching – Feature Matching – Frequency
Domain Motion Estimation – Video Segmentation.
UNIT III FUNDAMENTAL DATA ANALYSIS 9
Exploratory Data Analysis – Collection of Data – Graphical Presentation of Data – Classification of
Data – Storage and Retrieval of Data – Big Data – Challenges of Conventional Systems – Web
Data – Evolution of Analytic Scalability – Analytic Processes
and Tools – Analysis vs. Reporting.
UNIT IV MINING DATA STREAMS AND VIDEO ANALYTICS 9
Introduction To Streams Concepts – Sampling Data in a Stream – Filtering Streams – Counting
Distinct Elements in a Stream – Analytic Processes and Tools – Video shot boundary detection –
Model Based Annotation and Video Mining – Video21ECV103
Database – Video Categorization – Video Query Categorization.
UNIT V EMERGING APPLICATIONS 9

Affective Video Content Analysis – Parsing a Video Into Semantic Segments – Video
Indexing and Abstraction for Retrievals – Automatic Video Trailer Generation – Video In painting
– Forensic Video Analysis
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the fundamental concepts and algorithms for
CO1 Understand
performing video analysis
Apply different motion estimation and data analytics techniques to Apply
CO2
address the challenges in video processing
Apply the mathematical model for solving motion estimation and
CO3 Apply
data analytic problems.
Apply the role of video analytics in emerging applications with Apply
CO4
case studies
Analyze different approaches of motion estimation and data
CO5 Analyze
analytics for solving real world problems.
Analyze and apply algorithms for developing solutions for real world Analyze
CO6
problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A. Murat Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
2. Oges Marques, “Practical Image and Video Processing Using MATLAB”, Wiley and Sons
(IEEE Press), 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Anand Rajaraman, Jeffrey David Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Cambridge

University Press, 2012.
2. Alan C. Bovik, “Handbook of Image and Video processing”, Second Edition, Academic Press,
2005.
Course Designer: Mrs.T.Ruba, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2
CO6 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2.4 2 2

21ECV104 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL AND IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the basic signal in the field of biomedical.
● To describe the techniques for analyzing bio signals.
● To help students in learning the principles and various biomedical image
processing techniques.
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF BIO-SIGNALS 9

Nature of bio-signals, characteristics of various bio-signals: ECG, EMG, EEG, ERG, ERP, EGG,
PCG, ENG, EOG, Speech signal and VAG-Interference associated with bio-signal - Objective and
difficulties in biomedical signal analysis - Computer aided diagnosis.
UNIT II FILTERING FOR REMOVAL OF ARTIFACTS 9
Fundamental Concepts of Filtering - Time domain: synchronous averaging, moving average filters,
Derivative-based operators to remove low frequency artifacts - Frequency domain: Removal of
high-frequency noise: Butterworth low pass filters- Removal of low-frequency noise: Butterworth
high pass filters- Removal of periodic artifacts: Notch and comb filters - Optimal filtering - Adaptive
Filters for Removal of Interference: adaptive noise canceler- LMS adaptive filter- RLS adaptive filter
UNIT III BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 9

Electric Activities of the Cell - Electrocardiogram: Signal of Cardiovascular System -
Cardiovascular Diseases and ECG - Processing and Feature Extraction of ECG -
Electroencephalogram: Signal of the Brain -Evoked Potentials- Diseases of Central Nervous
System and EEG - Processing and Feature Extraction of EEG - Electromyogram:
Signal of Muscles - Processing and Feature Extraction of EMG
UNIT IV BIOMEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Principles of Computed Tomography - X-Ray Imaging and Computed Tomography - Magnetic
Resonance Imaging - Ultrasound Imaging
UNIT V MODELING BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS 9
Parametric System Modeling - Autoregressive or All-pole Modeling - Pole-zero Modeling -
Electromechanical Models of Signal Generation - Application: Heart-rate Variability -
Spectral Modeling and Analysis of PCG Signal.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamentals of Bio medical signal and
CO1 Understand
Image processing techniques.
Apply filtering to remove physiological interferences and Apply
CO2 artifacts from bio signals.
Apply different methods of signal processing techniques to Apply
CO3 analyze the ECG, EEG & EMG signals.
Design and Implement various algorithm to process Apply

CO4 medical images using MATLAB.
Analyze
Analyze various Biomedical Signal Characteristics using
CO5
appropriate signal processing technique.
Develop a mathematical model of various image Analyze
CO6 processing techniques to analyze their performance.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis–A case study approach”,2nd
Edition, Wiley Inter science /IEEE Press, 2012.
2. Kayvan Najarian, Robert Splinter, Biomedical Signal and Image Processing ,2nd Edition
,CRC Press, 2014
REFERENCES:
1. D.C.Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2005.
2. Willis J. Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2003.
3. Leif Sornmo, Pablo Laguna, “Bioelectrical Signal Processing in Cardiac & Neurological
Applications”, Elsevier,2005.
4. Arnon Cohen, “Bio–Medical Signal Processing”, Vol I and Vol II, CRC Press Inc., 1999.
Course Designer: Mr.A.Nagaraj,AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO5 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO6 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 3 -
CAM 2.8 2.5 2.6 - 2.3 - 2.3

(Avg)

21ECV105 DSP PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• Basics on Digital Signal Processors
• Programmable DSP‘s Architecture, On-chip Peripherals and Instruction set
• Programming for signal processing applications
• Advanced Programmable DSP Processors
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSPs 9

Introduction to Programmable DSPs, Architectural Features of PDSPs - Multiplier and Multiplier
accumulator – Modified Bus Structures and Memory access – Multiple access memory – Multi-port
memory – VLIW architecture- Pipelining – Special Addressing modes in P-DSPs – On chip
Peripherals, Applications of Programmable DSPs.
.
UNIT II TMS320C5X PROCESSOR 9
Architecture of C5X Processor – Addressing modes – Assembly language Instructions - Pipeline
structure, On-chip Peripherals – Block Diagram of DSP starter kit (DSK) – Software Tools, DSK
on-board peripherals, Application Programs for processing real time signals
UNIT III TMS320C6X PROCESSOR 9

Architecture of the C6x Processor - Instruction Set – Addressing modes, Assembler directives, On-
chip peripherals, DSP Development System: DSP Starter Kit - Code Composer Studio - Support
Files – Introduction to AIC23 codec and other on-board peripherals, Real-Time Programming
Examples for Signals and Noise generation, Frequency analysis, Filter design.
UNIT IV ADVANCED PROCESSORS 9

Study of TI‘s advanced processors - TMS320C674x and TMS320C55x DSPs, ADSP‘s Blackfin
and Sigma DSP Processors, NXP‘s DSP56Fxx Family of DSP Processors, Comparison of the
features of TI, ADSP and NXP DSP family processors.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN DSP SYSTEM DESIGN 9

An Overview of the Application Notes on DSP Systems-Evolution of FPGA Based DSP System
Design-Design Flow for an FPGA Based System Design-Softcore Processors -
Comparison of the Performances of the Systems Designed Using FPGAs and Digital Signal
Processors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the architecture details and instruction sets of
CO1 various DSP processors. Understand
Apply the knowledge of programming skills to develop code for

Apply
CO2 processing real time signals.
Design and implement DSP algorithm using code composer studio.
Apply
CO3
Analyze various DSP algorithms for real time application.
Analyze
CO4
Compare and evaluate various DSP algorithms.
Evaluate
CO5
Design DSP based system for real time applications.
Create
CO6
TEXT BOOKS:
1. B.Venkataramani and M.Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors – Architecture, Programming and
Applications– Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited. New Delhi, 2003.
2. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Digital Signal Processing Thomson Publications, 1st Edition,
2004
REFERENCES:
1. Rulph Chassaing and Donald Reay, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713
and C6416 DSK, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication, 2012 (Reprint).
2. K Padmanabhan, R. Vijayarajeswaran, Ananthi. S, A Practical Approach to Digital
SignalProcessing, New Age International, 1 st Edition, 2006.
Course Designer: Mr.A.Manoj Prabaharan AP\ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 3
CAM 2.
(Avg) 3 3 3 5 2 2.5

L T P C
21ECV106 SOFTWARE DEFINED AND COGNITIVE RADIO
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic concept of Software defined and Cognitive Radio
• To impart the knowledge of Cognitive Radio and Networks
• To introduce the different Dynamic Spectrum Access of Cognitive radio
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE DEFINED AND COGNITIVE 9
RADIO
Software Radio Aspects, The Software Communications Architecture (SCA),
The Operating Environment, The SCA Specification Structure - General Requirements and Services.
Cognitive Radio: Introduction to cognitive radios, Economics of cognitive Radio- spectrum
awareness, spectrum subleasing, spectrum sharing
Unit II COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS(CRN) 9
Cognitive radio features and capabilities - Research challenges in cognitive radio - Cognitive radio
architectures for NeXt Generation (XG) networks - Cognitive radio standardization - Limitations with
Cognitive Radio Network Applications - Architectural Descriptions of Cognitive Radio Networks -
Cognitive Radio Networks as Heterogeneous Systems - Technologies to Drive Cognitive Radio
Network.
Unit III SPECTRUM SENSING IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Energy Detection Techniques - Matched Filter Detection Techniques - Cyclo-stationary Feature
Detection Techniques - Waveform-Based Sensing Techniques - Radio Identification Sensing
Techniques - Techniques that Employ Multiple Antennas - Determining Sensing Accuracy-
Cooperative Spectrum Sensing in Cognitive Radio Networks - Spectrum Sensing for Cognitive Multi-
Radio Networks.
Unit IV DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS OF COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Spectrum access models - Dynamic spectrum access architecture - Medium access control for
dynamic spectrum access - Open issues in dynamic spectrum access - Centralized dynamic
spectrum access - Distributed dynamic spectrum access: cooperative and non- cooperative
approaches.
Unit V COGNITIVE RADIO APPLICATIONS 9
Location Estimation & Sensing, Mobility management, UWB Cognitive Radio, Cognitive radios in
wireless communication, Cognitive Application Challenges.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the concept of Software defined and Cognitive Understand

Radio
Apply various techniques in Cognitive Radio Networks for the Apply
CO2
Spectrum Sensing.
Apply the Cognitive Radio design Apply
CO3 methodologies for developing the wireless
applications.
CO4 Analyze the performance of various Spectrum Access Analyze
technique in Cognitive Radio networks
CO5 Analyze the different cognitive radio techniques for spectrum holes Analyze
detection
CO6 Analyze the performance of spectrum availability in cognitive radio Analyze
networks using various simulation tools.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bodhaswar TJ Maharaj, Babatunde Seun Awoyemi, “Developments in Cognitive Radio
Networks: Future Directions for Beyond 5G”, Springer, 2022.
2. Ekram Hossain, Dusit Niyato, Zhu Han, “Dynamic Spectrum Access and
Management in CognitiveRadio Networks”, Cambridge University Press 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John Wiley
&Sons Ltd., 2009.
2. John Bard, Vincent J, Kovarik Jr, “Software Defined Radio: The Software
Communications Architecture” Wiley 2007.
3. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, and Y. Thomas Hou, “Cognitive Radio
Communications and Networks - Principles and Practice”, Elsevier Inc., 2010.
4. Bruce Fette, Cognitive Radio Technology - Second Edition, Elsevier, 2009.
5. Huseyin Arslan, “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless
Systems”, Springer, 2007.
Course Designer : Mr.R.Abdul Sikkandhar,AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 1.8 2 3 2 2 2 2.5

L T P C
21ECV107 MACHINE VISION
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:(Min three)
 To review image processing techniques for computer vision.
 To understand Camera model and feature detecting techniques.
 To study segmentation, object recognition and it applications.
UNIT I Introduction to Computer Vision and Projective Geometry 9

Introduction to Computer Vision, Applications, Camera Model- Pinhole camera, Camera
parameters, intrinsic and extrinsic parameters, Projective Geometry- Perspective Projection,
Orthographic Projection, Affine Projection, camera parameters for perspective projection
UNIT II Face Detection, Matching and Alignment 9

Interest point detection, corner detection, SIFT, Feature matching- RANSAC, matching
strategy and error rates, 2D Feature based Alignment- Least squares method
UNIT III Segmentation and Clustering 9
Segmentation-Thresholding and Connected component algorithm, Contour Detection, Region
Segmentation, Motion Segmentation- Grouping- K- means clustering, Graph cut
UNIT IV Object Recognition 9
Object detection, Object Modeling, Model based object recognition, Scene and Object based
recognition, Shape based recognition.
UNIT V Applications 9
Face Recognition, Emotion Recognition Scene Understanding, Action Recognition, Augmented
Reality
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to comprehend and describe basic concepts of image
CO1 processing. Understand
Apply various feature extraction methods and matching Apply

CO2 algorithms to find the similarities of two regions
Apply numerous segmentation techniques and grouping the Apply

CO3 regions into meaningful segments
Analyze object recognitions techniques to understand the Analyze

CO4 shape and scene of an image.
Analyze various segmentation and object recognition Analyze
CO5 techniques.
Simulate and analyze different computer vision algorithms Analyze
CO6 using modern tools.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R Szeliski, “Computer vision: algorithms and applications”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. David A. Forsyth, Jean Ponce, “Computer Vision – A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall,
2003, ISBN: 0130851981.
2. Richard Hartley and Andrew Zisserman, “Multiple View Geometry in Computer
Vision”, Second Edition, Cambridge University Press, March 2004.
3. Al Bovik, “Handbook of Image & Video Processing”, Academic Press, 2000, ISBN:
0121197905.
4. Chris Stauffer and W.E.L Grimson, “Adaptive background mixture models for real-
time tracking”. In IEEE Computer Vision and Pattern Recognition, 2242–2252, June 1999.
5. http://www.ius.cs.cmu.edu/demos/facedemo.html
Course Designer: Dr. K.A.Shahul Hameed., Professor/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 3
CAM 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.5

(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV1N01 MACHINE LEARNING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of machine learning.
 To understand and build supervised learning models.
 To understand and build unsupervised learning models.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING 9

Review of Linear Algebra for machine learning; Introduction and motivation for machine
learning; Examples of machine learning applications, Vapnik-Chervonenkis (VC) dimension,
Probably Approximately Correct (PAC) learning, Hypothesis spaces, Inductive bias,
Generalization, Bias variance trade-off.
Unit II SUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Linear Regression Models: Least squares, single & multiple variables, Bayesian linear regression,
gradient descent, Linear Classification Models: Discriminant function – Perceptron algorithm,
Probabilistic discriminative model - Logistic regression, Probabilistic generative model – Naive
Bayes, Maximum margin classifier – Support
vector machine, Decision Tree, Random Forests
Unit III ENSEMBLE TECHNIQUES AND UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Combining multiple learners: Model combination schemes, Voting, Ensemble Learning -
bagging, boosting, stacking, Unsupervised learning: K-means, Instance Based Learning: KNN,
Gaussian mixture models and Expectation maximization.
Unit IV NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Multilayer perceptron, activation functions, network training – gradient descent optimization –
stochastic gradient descent, error back propagation, from shallow networks to deep networks –
Unit saturation (aka the vanishing gradient problem) – ReLU, hyperparameter tuning, batch
normalization, regularization, dropout.
Unit V DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF MACHINE LEARNING 9
EXPERIMENTS
Guidelines for machine learning experiments, Cross Validation (CV) and resampling – K- fold CV,
bootstrapping, measuring classifier performance, assessing a single classification algorithm and
comparing two classification algorithms – t test, McNemar’s test, K-fold CV paired t test
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basic concepts of machine learning Understand
Apply regression methods to Construct supervised learning Apply
CO2
models.
Apply the algorithms to a real problem, optimize the models on the Apply
CO3 expected accuracy that can be achieved by applying the
models
Analyze and compare different models
CO4 Analyze
Analyze machine and deep learning algorithms.

CO5
Construct and create unsupervised learning algorithms Create

CO6
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, Fourth
Edition,2020.
2. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective,
“SecondEdition”, CRC Press, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Christopher M. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.

2. Tom Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 1997.
3. Mehryar Mohri, Afshin Rostamizadeh, Ameet Talwalkar, “Foundations of Machine
Learning”,Second Edition, MIT Press, 2012, 2018.
4. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016
5. Sebastain Raschka, Vahid Mirjalili , “Python Machine Learning”, Packt publishing 3rd
Edition,2019.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.1
3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.2
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.3
3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - 2
CO.4
3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - 2
CO.5
3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - 2
CO.6
3 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 - 2
CAM
Course
Vertical II – 21ECV200- High Speed Communications
1. 21ECV201 Advanced wireless Techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV202 Advanced Communication Network Security 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV203 High Performance Networks 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV204 MIMO System Modeling 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV205 Fiber optic Communication & networks 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV206 Ultra-wide band Communication Networks 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV207 5G Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV2N02 Introduction to Cyber Security 3 0 0 3

21ECV201 ADVANCED WIRELESS TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
● To give an idea about various generations of wireless and cellular networks
● To familiarize students about fundamentals of 3G Services, its protocols and
applications
● To provide basic understanding of the key technologies and enablers of 5G and
beyond 5Gcommunication systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: History of mobile cellular systems, First Generation, Second Generation,
Generation2.5,Overview of 3G& 4G,3GPP and 3GPP2 standards - LTE Network Architecture
– LTE Air Interface.
UNIT II CAPACITY OF WIRELESS CHANNELS 9
AWGN Channel Capacity - Resources of the AWGN Channel - Linear Time-Invariant Gaussian
Channels - Capacity of Fading Channels.
UNIT III LTE AIR INTERFACE 9
LTE radio link Control - LTE Physical Layer - Channel mapping of protocol layers - LTE Air
InterfaceLTE Air Interface procedures
UNIT IV DRIVERS FOR 5G 9
Historical Trend of Wireless Communications – Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G – 5G
Roadmap – 10 Pillars of 5G – 5G in North America – 5G in Asia – 5G Architecture – The 5G
Internet :Internet of Things and Context - Awareness – Networking Reconfiguration and Virtualization
Support – Mobility – Quality of Service Control.
UNIT V BEYOND THE FIRST RELEASE OF 5G 9
Integrated Access-Backhaul – Operation in Unlicensed Spectra– NOMA for 5G networks –
Machine-Type Communication –Device-To-Device Communication – Spectrum and Duplex
Flexibility –D2D and V2X Communications: Introduction – Technical Status and Standardization
Overview – V2X Communications for Road Safety Applications – Industrial
Implementation of V2X in the Automotive Domain
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the wireless channel characteristics and its

statisticalmodels Understand
Apply the knowledge of optimization technique to design
CO2 suitablechannel model Apply
Analyze the Channel characteristics & Performance evaluation

CO3 Analyze
Analyze various modulation and multiplexing schemes in
CO4 wirelessnetworks Analyze
Evaluate the Channel capacity for various channels used

CO5 forwireless communication Evaluate
CO6 Model the wireless channel to estimate the path loss using Apply
MATLAB
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JuhaKorhonen, Introduction to 3G Mobile Communication, Artech House,
(www.artechhouse.com), Jan 2003, ISBN-10: 1580535070
2. Jonathan Rodriguez, Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks John Wiley &sons, 2015.
3. Patrick Marsch, Deutsche Bahn AG, ÖmerBulak, 5G System Design Architectural and
Functional Considerations and Long Term Research John Wiley &sons, 2018.
4. David Tse, Fundamentals of Wireless Communication Cambridge University Press 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Erik Dahlman, Stefan Parkvall, Johan Skold.5G NR: The Next Generation Wireless
AccessTechnology, Elsevier 2018.
2. Hossein Khaleghi Bizaki, Towards 5G Wireless Networks, A Physical Layer
Perspective,Intech open book series 2016.
3. Ayman Elnashar, Mohamed A. El-saidny, Mahmoud R. Sherif Design, Deployment
andPerformance of 4G-LTE Networks A Practical Approach, 2014.
Course Designer: Mrs. P.Deepa AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 3
CO.2 3 3 3
CO.3 3 3 3
CO.4 3 3 2 3
CO.5 3 2 3
CO.6 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 2.2 2.5 3 3 2 2 3
21ECV202 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION NETWORK L T P C
SECURITY 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the concept of security and explain symmetric and asymmetric key
algorithms
● To impart knowledge on integrity, authentication and key management.
● To outline the concept of network security and wireless network security.
UNIT I SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
OSI Security Architecture – Security Attacks - Classical Encryption techniques - Cipher Principles
– Data Encryption Standard - Block Cipher Design Principles and Modes of Operation- Multiple
Encryption and Triple DES - Placement of Encryption Function – Traffic Confidentiality.
UNIT II PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

Introduction to Number Theory - Public Key Cryptography and RSA - Key Management - Diffie–
Hellman key Exchange - Elliptic Curve Arithmetic - Elliptic Curve cryptography
UNIT III AUTHENTICATION AND HASH FUNCTION 9
Authentication requirements – Authentication functions - Message Authentication Codes – Hash
Functions – Security of Hash Functions and MACs - Secure Hash Algorithm –
HMAC- Digital Signatures – Authentication Protocols – Digital Signature Standard
UNIT IV NETWORK SECURITY 9
Authentication Applications: Kerberos – X.509 Authentication Service – Public key Infrastructure -
Electronic Mail Security – PGP – S/MIME - IP Security – Web Security
UNIT V SYSTEM LEVEL SECURITY 9
Intruders -Intrusion detection -Password management - Viruses and related Threats – Virus
Counter measures - Firewall Design Principles – Trusted Systems
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe fundamental concepts of security issues inthe
CO1 network. Understand
CO2 Apply the concept of key chipper and hash function to Apply
evaluate security mechanism
CO3 Apply the concepts of Digital Signature, Authentication Apply
to secure communication networks.
CO4 Analyze various classical encryption techniques andblock Analyze
ciphers
CO5 Analyze various protocols for network security to Analyze
protect against the threats in the networks.
CO6 Design and analyze various network security algorithmsusing open Analyze
source tool.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security –Principles and Practices”, 7th
Edition, pearson Education, 2016.
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd
edition, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kahate, “ Cryptography and Network security ”, Tata McGraw- Hill , 2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Yang.H, “ Security in Mobile Ad Hoc Networks: Challenges and Solution ”, IEEE Wireless
Communications, 2004.David J. Defatta, Joseph G. Lucas, William S. Hodgkiss, ” Digital
signal processing : a system design approach ”, John Wiley, 1995.
3. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography:Protocols, Algorithms, and Source Code in C”, John
wiley Sons Inc, 2017.
4. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”,

4thEdition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
Course Designer: Mr. A.Nagaraj,AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.6 3 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 -
CAM 2.8 2.6 2 - 3 - - - - - - 2.5 -
(Avg)
3- Strong 2- Medium -- 1- Weak

21ECV203 HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop a comprehensive understanding of multimedia networking.
● To introduce the layered communication architectures of high performance
networks.
● To study the types of VPN and tunneling protocols for security.
● To understand various layer protocols and security issues.
Introduction to Fundamentals of Networking, SONET- DWDM- DSL- ISDN- BISDN, ATM-
Features, Addressing signaling & Routing, Header structure, ATM adaptation layer, Management
control, Interworking with ATM.
UNIT II MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING APPLICATIONS 9

Streaming stored audio and video, Best effort service, protocols for real time interactive
applications, Beyond best effort, scheduling and policing mechanism integrated services, RSVP,
differentiated services.
UNIT III ADVANCED NETWORKS CONCEPTS 9
Architecture and performance, binary block codes, orthogonal, Biorthogonal, VPN-remote access
VPN, site-to-site VPN, tunneling to PPP, security in VPN, MPLS-operation, routing, tunneling and
use of FEC, traffic engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay networks, P2P connections
UNIT IV TRAFFIC MODELLING 9

Little’s theorem, Need for modeling, Poisson modeling and its failure, Non-poisson models,
Network performance evaluation, Non-Markovian –Pollaczek-Khinchin formula and M/G/1,
M/D/1, self-similar models and Batch-arrival model, Networks of Queues- Burke’s theorem and
Jackson theorem.
UNIT V NETWORK SECURITY AND MANAGEMENT 9
Network Architecture, SNMP basics, SNMP naming and OIDs, MIBs, SNMPv1 data types, SNMP
operations, Authentication applications- Kerberos, X.509 authentication service, Electronic mail
security-Pretty Good Privacy, IP Security-IP security overview, Firewalls-
Firewall design principles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Differentiate concepts of ATM, SONET and ISDN. Understand

Apply the knowledge of traffic models for the performance
CO2 evaluation of telecommunications networks. Apply
Analyze the performance parameter of computer network

CO3 Analyze
using any network simulation software.
CO4 Analyze the different protocols in multimedia networking Analyze
CO5 Evaluate the network performance and security. Evaluate
Design and simulate the given network using network

CO6 Create
simulation Software
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Walrand. J. Varatya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan
Kaufman publishers, 2nd edition, 2000.
2. J.F.Kurose & K.W. Ross, “Computer Networking-A Top Down Approach Featuring
the Internet”, Pearson, 6th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Second Edition 2010.
2. Aunurag Kumar, D. M. Anjunath, Joy Kuri, “Communication Networking”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 1st edition 2004.
3. LEOM-GarCIA, WIDJAJA, “communication networks”, TMH seventh reprint 2002.
4. Nader F.Mir, “Computer and Communication Networks”, first edition 2010.
Course Designer: Ms.J.JUDITH AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 - - - - - -
2 - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 - - - - - -
3 2 - - - - 2 -
CO.3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.5 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO.6 - - - -
3 3 3 2 3 - 3 2 3 -
CAM
(Avg) 2.8 2. 2. 2 2. - - - 3 - - 2 2. -
8 5 5 6
3- Strong 2- Medium -- 1- Weak
L T P C
21ECV204 MIMO SYSTEM MODELING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge about MIMO Channel modeling and system architecture.
● To introduce space time block codes and space time trellis codes.
● To explain the practical applications of MIMO systems.
UNIT – 1 Spatial Multiplexing And Channel Modeling 9
Review of SISO fading communication channels- Multiplexing capability of deterministic MIMO,
Physical modeling of MIMO Channels, Modeling of MIMO fading channels, MIMO
wireless communication, MIMO channel and signal model, A fundamental trade-off, MIMO
transceiver design, MIMO in wireless networks, MIMO in wireless standards.
UNIT – 2 Capacity and Multiplexing Architectures 9
The V-BLAST architecture, Fast fading MIMO channel. Receiver architectures, Slow fading
MIMO channel, D-BLAST: an outage-optimal architecture.
UNIT – 3 Diversity–Multiplexing Tradeoff And Space Time Block Codes 9

Diversity- tradeoff, Space time block codes on real and complex orthogonal designs, Code design
criteria for quasi-static channels (Rank, determinant and Euclidean distance), Quasi- orthogonal
designs and Performance analysis.
UNIT – 4 Space Time Trellis Codes 9

Representation of STTC, shift register, generator matrix, state-transition diagram, trellis
diagram, Code construction, Delay diversity as a special case of STTC and Performance
analysis.
UNIT – 5 MIMO Modeling 9
MIMO modeling, MIMO channel measurements, MIMO channel capacity, CDD, Space time
coding, advantages and applications of MIMO,Spatial multiplexing channel modeling:
Multiplexing capability of MIMO channels, Multi antenna systems,Multiple Input and Multiple
Output systems with various access schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the student will be able to:
Describe the concepts of mathematical model for the design of Understand
CO1
MIMO channels
Design a space time MIMO wireless communication Apply
CO2
architecture for the given specifications
Analyze and Design various space time block codes. Apply
CO3
Analyze the wireless channel characteristics and identify
CO4 appropriate channel models. Analyze
Analyze the performance of MIMO systems in various

CO5 Analyze
applications.
CO6 Design space time trellis codes for a given specification and Evaluate
develops skills to solve engineering problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hamid Jafarkhani, , “ Space-Time Coding: Theory and Practice ”, Cambridge University,
Press 2005.
2. Nei David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication ”,
Cambridge University Press 2005, Press 2005.
3. Paulraj, R. Nabar and D. Gore, “Introduction to Space-Time Wireless
Communications ”, Cambridge University, Press 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. E.G. Larsson and P. Stoica,“Space-Time Block Coding for Wireless
Communications ”, Cambridge University, Press 2008.
2. M. Janakiraman,“Space-time codes and MIMO systems ”, Artech House, 2004.
3. Ezio Biglieri , Robert Calder bank et al, “ MIMO Wireless Communications ”,
Cambridge University, Press 2007.
Course Designer:Mr.A.Manoj Prabaharan AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 3 3 2 3
CO.5 3 3 3 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 3 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 3 3 3 2.5 2 2.5
3- Strong 2- Medium-- 1- Weak

L T P C
21ECV205 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To explain the functionalities of fiber optic communication.
● To get exposed to various fiber optic network components and architectures.
● To impart knowledge on optical network design and management functions.
UNIT I OPTICAL NETWORK COMPONENTS 9

Free space optical communication, Introduction to optical Network Evolution, Optical
Multiplexers,Optical Filters, Optical Amplifiers, cross talks in SOAs ,Applications.
UNIT II TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ENGINEERING 9
Modulation and Demodulation, spectral efficiency, Error detection and correction, System model,
Transmitter and receiver, Power penalty and amplifiers, Crosstalk, dispersion and nonlinearities,
Wavelength stabilization, Overall design considerations.
UNIT III CLIENT LAYERS OF THE OPTICAL NETWORKS 9
SONET/SDH, Optical Transport Network, Ethernet, Multiprotocol Label Switching, Resilient
PacketRing, Storage-Area Networks
UNIT IV WDM NETWORK ELEMENTS AND DESIGN 9
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexers, Optical Cross connects, Cost Trade-Offs, LTD and RWA
Problems,Dimensioning Wavelength-Routing Networks, Statistical Dimensioning Models,
Maximum Load Dimensioning Models.
UNIT V PHOTONIC PACKET SWITCHING 9
Optical Time Division Multiplexing, Synchronization, Buffering, Burst Switching,
Testbeds- KEOPS, AON, CORD.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe various optical communication network components
CO1 Understand
andarchitectures.
Apply the concept of data communication network to
CO2 studyoptical transmission system engineering. Apply
Design simple optical networks using modern engineering Apply

CO3
tools.
Analyze the characteristics of various client layers of
CO4 opticalNetworks. Analyze
Analyze the performance of different optical
CO5 networkarchitectures. Analyze
Evaluate the photonic packet switching networks.

CO6 Evaluate
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami, Kumar N. Sivarajan, Galen H. Sasaki, “Optical Networks: A
practicalperspective,” Morgan Kaufman Publishers, Fourth edition, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Mohammad Ilyas, Hussein T. Mouftah, “Handbook of Optical Communication Networks”, Taylor
and Francis, First edition(Revised), 2019.
2. C.Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks :Concept,
Design andAlgorithms”, Prentice Hall of India, First Edition, 2002.
3. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical Communication Networks”, McGrawHill Revised Edition
2006.
Course Designer: Dr.M.Pandimadevi, ASP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO6 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CAM 2.8 2.2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2.5

(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV206 ULTRA-WIDE BAND COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To give fundamental concepts related to Ultra wide band
● To understand the channel model and signal processing for UWB
● .To acquires knowledge about UWB antennas and regulations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO UWB 9
Ultra wideband overview, Key benefits of UWB, UWB and Shannon’s theory,
Challenges for UWB, Basic properties of UWB signals and systems, Generation of UWB
waveforms
UNIT II UWB CHANNEL MODELS 9
A simplified UWB multipath channel model, A simplified UWB multipath channel model, Two-ray
UWB propagation model, Frequency domain autoregressive model, IEEE proposals for UWB
channel models
UNIT III UWB COMMUNICATIONS 9
Introduction, UWB modulation methods, UWB transmitter, UWB receiver, Multiple access
techniques in UWB, Capacity of UWB systems, Comparison of UWB with other wideband
communication systems, Interference and coexistence of UWB with other systems
UNIT IV UWB ANTENNAS AND ARRAYS 9

Antenna fundamentals, Antenna radiation for UWB signals, Suitability of conventional
antennas for the UWB system, Impulse antennas, Beamforming for UWB signals, Radar
UWB array systems
UNIT V UWB NETWORKS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Wireless Ad hoc Networking, UWB Wireless Sensor, Military applications, Commercial
applications, UWB potentials in medicine, Coexistence of DS-UWB with Wi-Max,
Vehicular radars in the 22–29 GHz band
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic concepts of ultra-wideband
CO1 Understand
communication
Apply the knowledge of UWB modulation, signal parameters
CO2 Apply
depending on the application.
CO3 Apply UWB technologies for transmission of UWB systems. Apply
Analyze the performance of UWB channels for transmission
CO4 Analyze
systems
Develop a comprehensive overview of UWB system design
that includes propagation, transmitter and receiver, antenna Evaluate
CO5
implementation, standards.
CO6 Design UWB antennas for various applications Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Ghavami, L. B. Michael and R. Kohno, “Ultra Wideband signals and systems in
Communication Engineering”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, NY, USA, 2007. 2.Homayoun
Nikookar and Ramjee Prasad, “Introduction to Ultra Wideband for Wireless Communications”1st
Edition, Springer Science & Business Media B.V. 2010.
3. Jeffrey H. Reed, “An Introduction to Ultra Wideband Communication systems”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
NJ, USA, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Kaiser, Feng Zheng “Ultra Wideband Systems with MIMO”, 1st Edition, John Wiley
& Sons Ltd, New York, 2010.
2. W. Pam Siriwongpairat and K. J. Ray Liu, “Ultra-Wideband Communications Systems:
Multiband OFDM approach” John Wiley and IEEE press, New York 2008.
Course Designer: Mrs.P.Murugeswari AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.4 3 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.5 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.6 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CAM
- - - - - - - - -
2.87 2 3 2 2
(Avg)
21ECV207 5G TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
● To introduce 5G essentials.
● To deliver basic understanding of the technologies and enablers of 5G and
beyond 5Gcommunication systems.
● To aware about terms such as MIMO,mmWave and NOMA
UNIT I 5G STANDARDIZATION 9
Historical Trend of Wireless Communications – Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G
– 5GRoadmap – 10 Pillars of 5G – The Next Generation—5G/NR – 5G Standardization:
Overview of Standardization and Regulation – ITU-R Activities From 3G to 5G – 5G and IMT- 2020.
UNIT II RADIO-INTERFACE ARCHITECTURE 9

Overall System Architecture – Radio Protocol Architecture – User-Plane Protocols –
Control-Plane Protocols – Internet of Things and Context‐Awareness Networking –
Reconfiguration and Virtualisation Support.
UNIT III COGNITIVE RADIO AND SON FOR 5G WIRELESS NETWORKS 9
Introduction – Overview of Cognitive Radio Technology in 5G Wireless – Spectrum Optimization
using Cognitive Radio –Energy‐Efficient Cognitive Radio Technology – Key Requirements and
Challenges for 5G Cognitive Terminals - SON in UMTS and LTE – The Need for SON in 5G –
Evolution towards Small‐Cell Dominant HetNets.
UNIT IV RF TECHNOLOGIES AT mm WAVE FREQUENCIES 9
LTE/NR Dual-Connectivity – LTE/NR Coexistence – ADC and DAC Considerations – LO
generation and Phase Noise Aspects – Power Amplifier Efficiency in Relation to Unwanted
Emission – Receiver Noise Figure, Dynamic Range, and Bandwidth Dependencies – Green
Flexible RF for 5G.
UNIT V mm WAVE AND TERAHERTZ SPECTRUM FOR 6G WIRELESS 9
Introduction to mmWave and THz Spectrum – Propagation at the mmWave and THz Frequencies –
Channel Measurement Efforts – Propagation at mmWave and THz Frequencies – Beamformingand
Antenna Patterns – Channel Models – The mmWave Communications Systems – The THz
Communications Systems – Standardization Efforts.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the function of next generation technology Understand
Apply the knowledge of 5G techniques to solve the existing

CO2 problems in communication. Apply
Analyze the performance of 4G and 5G system. Analyze

CO3
Analyze the factors affecting deployment of 5G in
CO4 Indianscenario Analyze
CO5 Evaluate the Spectral efficiency for various frequency bands. Evaluate
CO6 Generate the 5G uplink and downlink model using MATLAB Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jonathan Rodriguez , Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks, John Wiley &sons, 2015.
2. Erik Dahlman, Stefan Parkvall, Johan Skold.,5G NR: The Next Generation Wireless
AccessTechnology, Elsevier 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. 6G Mobile Wireless Networks Yulei Wu, Sukhdeep Singh Springer.2021.
2. Ayman Elnashar, Mohamed A. El-saidny, Mahmoud R. Sherif Design, Deployment
andPerformance of 4G-LTE Networks A Practical Approach, 2014.
Course Designer: Mrs. P.Deepa AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 3
CO.2 3 3 3
CO.3 3 3 3
CO.4 3 3 2 3
CO.5 3 2 3
CO.6 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CAM 2. 2.
8 2.2 5 3 3 2 2 3
(Avg)
Course
1. 21ECV301 Advanced Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV302 MEMS and NEMS 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV303 Nano Electronics 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV304 IoT Ecosystem 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV305 IoT Networks and Protocols 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV3N03 Industrial IoT 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV307 Smart Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV308 Block Chain Technology 3 0 0 3

L T P C
21ECV301 ADVANCED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To expertise on sensor networks and their Applications, localization and positioning.

● To explain the concepts of routing protocols and topology control.
● To summarize the Operating Systems and Programming Concepts for WSNs
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Wireless Sensor Networks - Characteristics requirements- -Unique Constraints and Challenges –

Difference between Mobile adhoc and Sensor Networks- Advantages of sensor networks - Sensor
Node Architecture - Sensor Network Architecture - Sensor Networks Applications: Environmental
Monitoring, Industry Automation, Disaster Management, Mobile Crowd Sensing Applications -Smart
Cities, Road Transportation, Health Care and Well-Being
,Marketing/Advertising.
UNIT II LOCALIZATION AND POSITIONING 9
Properties of localization and positioning procedures, Possible approaches, Mathematical basics for
the lateration problem, Single-hop localization, Positioning in multi hop environments, Impact of
anchor placement.
UNIT 3 ROUTING PROTOCOLS FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK 9
Medium Access Control - The S-MAC Protocol- IEEE 802.15.4 Standard and ZigBee - General
Issues - Geographic, Energy-Aware Routing - Unicast Geographic Routing - Routing on a Curve-
Energy-Minimizing Broadcast - Energy-Aware Routing to a Region - Attribute- Based Routing -
Directed Diffusion - Rumor Routing - Geographic Hash Tables .
UNIT 4 TOPOLOGY CONTROL 9
Topology Control - Clustering - Time Synchronization - Clocks and Communication Delays - Interval
Methods - Reference Broadcasts - Localization and Localization Services -Ranging Techniques -
Range-Based Localization Algorithms - Other Localization Algorithms - Location Services .
UNIT V OPERATING SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMING IN WSN 9
Operating Systems for WSNs: Introduction, Architecture, Execution Model Case Study: Popular
Operating Systems-TinyOS, Contiki, Magnet OS, Mantis OS. Programming WSNs: Simulation
Tools-TOSSIM, COOJA, Castalia, NS-3 Case study: Performance comparison of energy efficient
cluster based routing protocols
Total:45 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the advantages and applications of sensor networks. Understand
Apply methods of localization and positioning methods to design sensor

CO2 Apply
networks
CO3 Apply the knowledge of sensor network to design different network Apply
architecture.
CO4 Analyze the various routing protocols in sensor networks. Analyze
CO5 Analyze the flat and hierarchical network topology control. Apply
CO6 Develop Energy efficient protocols for wireless sensor networks. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Feng Zhao Feng Zhao Leonidas Guibas Leonidas Guibas, Wireless Sensor Networks,”An
Information Processing Approach, 1st Edition, 2004, Elsevier.
REFERENCES:
1. Holger Karl And Andreas Willig, “ Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks ”, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
2. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli, &TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks-s Technology,

Protocols, And Applications ”, John Wiley, 2007.
3. Nandini Mukherjee SarmisthaNeogySarbani Roy, Building Wireless Sensor Networks

Theoretical & Practical Perspectives, CRC Press, 2016.
4. John R. Vacca, Handbook of Sensor Networking Advanced Technologies and

Applications, CRC Press, 2015.
Course Designer: Mr.B. Michael vinoline rinoj, AP/ECE

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 2 2
CO.3 2 2 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 2 2
CO.6 3 3 2 2 2
CAM
2.5 3 2 2 2 2
(Avg)
3- Strong - Medium 1- Weak

21ECV302 MEMS and NEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of micro and nano electromechanical devices
 To explain the fabrication process Microsystems
 To impart the knowledge of design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS 9

Introduction to Design of MEMS and NEMS, Overview of Nano and Microelectromechanical
Systems, Applications of Micro and Nanoelectromechanical systems, Materials for MEMS and
NEMS: Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals
UNIT II MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, CVD, Sputtering Etching techniques,
Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.
UNIT III MICRO SENSORS 9
MEMS Sensors: Design of Acoustic wave sensors, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive Pressure
sensors, Case study: Piezoelectric energy harvester
UNIT IV MICRO ACTUATORS 9
Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys, Actuation
using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces, Case Study:RF Switch.
UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9

Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics, Shrodinger Equation, ZnO nanorods based NEMS
device: Gas sensor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic principles of MEMS and NEMS
CO1 Understand
Explain the theoretical foundations of quantum mechanics and
CO2 Understand
Nano Systems
Design a micro sensor for a given specific application
CO3 Apply
Apply the concept of actuation in design of actuators for
CO4 various applications Apply
Analyze various MEMS fabrication technologies used in

CO5 Analyze
industries
Analyze the function and performance of electro mechanical
CO6 Analyze
transducers like sensors and actuators
TEXT BOOKS:
1. SergeyEdwardLyshevski,―MEMSandNEMS:Systems,Devices,andStructures‖CRC Press,
2002, ebook-2018.
2. ChangLiu,―Foundations of MEMS‖,Pearson education India limited,2006.
3. StephenD.Senturia,‖MicrosystemDesign‖,KluwerAcademicPublishers,2001
REFERENCES:
1. TaiRan Hsu,‖MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture‖ ,TataMcraw Hill, 2002
2. D. S. Ballantine- Acoustic Wave Sensors: Theory, Design, and Physico-Chemical
Applications, Boston: Academic Press, 1997.
3. Massood Tabib-Azar - Microactuators : Academic Press, 1998
Course Designer: Ms.M.Brindha AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.5 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO.6 3 3 - - 3 2 - - 3 -
- - -
CAM
2.6 2.4 2 - 3 2 - - - - - 3 -
(Avg)
21ECV303 NANO ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
 To introduce the concept of Nano electronics, Nano devices and molecular electronics.
 To explain the properties of Nano particles, Carbon nanostructures & Fuel Cells.
 To Understand the recent trends in Nano electronics and its applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NANO ELECTRONICS 9

Nano electronics in recent scenario - Crystal Structure –Semiconductors- Band theory– Donors -
Acceptors and Deep traps, Mobility – Excitons, one dimensional, two dimensional, three
dimensional Nano structured materials, metal Oxides- Physical, Chemical and Optical properties.
UNIT II SYNTHESIS AND PREPARATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Top down Approaches-Grinding, high energy ball milling, Injection molding-Bottom up Approaches-
Sol-gel, Self-assembled monolayer, Physical and Chemical vapour deposition, thin films, epitaxy-
Lithography.
UNIT III NANO MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION 9

X-ray diffraction, Powder diffraction, Structural analysis, Scanning Electron
Microscopy, FESEM, AFM, Transmission Electron Microscope, Spectroscopic
techniques: UV-Visible, Infra-red Spectroscopy, rotational, vibrational
photoluminescence (PL).
UNIT IV CARBON NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Introduction, Carbon Molecules – Nature of the Carbon Bond, New Carbon Structures,
Carbon Clusters – Small Carbon Clusters, Alkali-Doped C60 – Superconductivity in C60 – Larger
and Smaller Fullerenes – Other Buckyballs, Carbon Nanotubes – Fabrication – Structure –Graphene,
Application of Carbon Nanotubes – Field Emission and Shielding –Computers – Fuel Cells –
Chemical Sensors – Catalysis – Mechanical Reinforcement.
UNIT V NANO DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 9

Microelectromechanical systems (MEMSs), Nanoelectromechanical systems(NEMSs), Fabrication-
Nano devices and Nano machines, Molecular and Supramolecular switches- Spintronics- Nano
Crystals devices- Graphene based Liquid Crystal devices, Nano electronics in Energy- Nano
sensors for biomedical
applications- Nano biometrics -Nanobots- Smart dust sensor for the future, Nano medicine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Summarize the concept of Nanomaterials and Understand
CO1 Nanodevices.
Apply the concept of quantum mechanics in Nanomaterials to Apply
CO2 classify the various Nano devices in terms of its applications.
Apply the knowledge of spatial distribution of molecules to determine Apply

CO3 the size of the Nanoparticles.
Analyze the various properties of the Nano tubes by applying Analyze

CO4 analysis techniques.
Analyze the characteristics of various Nano materials in terms of Analyze

CO5 methods of synthesis.
Evaluate the performance of Nanomaterials according to its Evaluate

CO6 application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Charles P. Poole, Jr. and Frank J. Owens, “Introduction to Nano Technology”, John Wiley &
Sons, First edition (Revised )2008.
2. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse,
“Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies” Chapam & Hall / CRC Press, First
edition, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. George W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nano electronics”, Prentice Hall ,2008.
2. Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, Michael A. Stroscio, “Introduction to Nano electronics:
Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications”,
Cambridge University Press, Revised edition,2012.
Course Designer: Dr.M.Pandimadevi,ASP/ECE

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO6 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CAM 2.8 2.2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2.7

(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV304 IOT ECOSYSTEM
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce about the fundamentals of sensors and various topologies and types used in
sensors
 To explain the basic sensing techniques in SIoT and wearable sensors
 To impart knowledge on Software tool used in analysis of sensors in IoT
Unit – 1 IOT SENSING AND ACTUATION 9

Evolution of IoT, IoT Networking Components, Introduction, Sensors, Sensor Characteristics,
Sensorial Deviations, Sensing Types, Sensing Considerations, Actuators, Actuators Types,
Actuator Types, Actuator Characteristics, Data Formats
Unit – 2 IOT PROCESSING TOPOLOGIES AND TYPES 9

Processing in IoT, Processing Topologies, IoT Device Design and Selection Considerations,
Processing Offloading, Offload location, Offload decision making, Offloading considerations,
Zigbee, Bluetooth, LoRa, NB-Iot
Unit – 3 SENSING PRINCIPLES AND WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK 7

Anatomy of Sensors, Physical Principles of Sensing, Use of Basic Sensing Principles in RFID
Technology, Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs), WSN Operating Systems, WSN OS Design
Issues
Unit – 4 SIoT and WEARABLE SENSORS 9

Social IoT, Smart Things to Social Things , The Epitome of SIoT, Smart Thing Relationships in
SIoT, SIoT Architecture, Features of SIoT System, Social Internet of Vehicles (SIoV), SIoV
Application Services, World of Wearables, Attributes of wearables, Textiles And Clothing:
The Meta-Wearable, Challenges and Future Wearables
Unit – 5 PACKET TRACER AND IOT 11

IoT and Packet Tracer, Packet Tracer Programming Environment, Visual (Blockly) Programming
Language, Simple Smart Light Project, IoT Projects in Packet Tracer, Smart Things Directly
Connected with Gateways, Smart Things and Sensors Directly Connected with MCUs (Without
Gateways)
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the characteristics of sensors and actuators Understand
CO1
Apply the various properties of sensors to process the devices in IoT and
CO2 Apply
SIoT
Design an IoT system to solve real world problems using sensors.
CO3 Apply
Analyze the fundamental concepts of IoT Packet tracer software tool
CO4
Apply
Analyze different types of sensors with respect to WSN and RFID
CO5 Analyze
CO6 Assess the function of various sensors using any simulation tools Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sudip Mishra, Anandarup Mukherjee, Arijit Roy: Introduction to IOT,
Cambridge University Press,2014
2. Muhammad Azhar Iqbal, Sajjad Hussain, Huanlai Xing, Muhammad Ali Imran,
Enabling The Internet of Things, IEEE Press, John Wiley & Sons, 2021.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiroto Yasuura ,Smart Sensors at the IoT Frontier ,1st ed. 2018
2. Edward Sazonov, Michael R. Neuman, Wearable Sensors Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Academic Press,2014
COURSE DESIGNER: Mrs.R.Devika AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 3 2 2 2 2 2
21ECV305 IOT NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce IoT and its applications
 To understand the concepts of IoT Architecture
 To analyze various IoT communication Protocols
 To impart knowledge on IoT-based system design
Unit – 1 Introduction to IoT 9
Introduction to IoT, IoT Architecture: Physical design of IoT, Logical design of IoT,IoT enabling
technologies ,IoT levels and deployment templates
Unit – 2 IoT Architecture 9

The Need for a Common Ground for the IoT ,The IoT Architectural Reference Model as
Enabler, IoT in Practice, IoT in Logistics and Health, IoT Reference Model, SOA based
Architecture, API-based Architecture
Unit – 3 IoT Communication Technologies 9

Introduction, Infrastructure Protocols, Discovery Protocols, Data protocols (MQTT ,
MQTT-SN, CoAP , AMQP , XMPP , SOAP , REST, WebSocket)
Unit – 4 Associated IoT Technologies 9

Cloud Computing, Virtualization, Cloud models and implementations, Sensor-Cloud:
Sensors-as-a-Service, Fog Computing in IoT
Unit – 5 IoT Case studies 9

IoT Paradigms, Challenges, and the Future Trends. Case study: IoT in Smart cities,
Agricultural IoT, Vehicular IoT, Healthcare IoT
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Comprehend the essentials of IoT and its applications Understand

Apply the concept of IoT Architecture Reference
CO2 Apply
model and IoT Protocols for developing an Application
Apply the concept in IoT to categorize associated
CO3 Apply
technologies and applications.
Analyze the performance of various IoT
CO4 Analyze
Communication protocols
Analyze the concerns in real time usage of various IoT
CO5 Analyze
protocols
CO6 Design IoT-based systems for real-world problems. Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti,Publisher: Universities Press (India) Private Limited,

2015.
2. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Robert Barton, Jerome Henry,
“IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the
Internet of Things”, CISCO Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Bassi, Alessandro, et al, “Enabling things to talk”, Springer-Verlag Berlin An, 2016.
2. Rajkumar Buyya , Amir Vahid Dastjerdi ,Internet of Things Principles and
Paradigms, 2016 Elsevier
3. Hersent, Olivier, David Boswarthick, and Omar Elloumi. The internet of things: Key
applications and protocols. John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
4. Buyya, Rajkumar, and Amir Vahid Dastjerdi, eds. Internet of Things: Principles and
paradigms. Elsevier, 2016.
5. Sudip Misra Anandarup Mukherjee ,Arijit Roy, Introduction to IoT, Cambridge
university press,2021
COURSE DESIGNER : Dr.M.Sheik Dawood Prof/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 2
CO.2 2 2
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5

21ECV3N03 INDUSTRIAL IOT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To make impart knowledge on various sensors and technologies in IIOT
 To provide students with good depth of knowledge of Designing Industrial IOT
Systems for various application
 To explain the AI & CPS techniques involved in IIOT
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL IOT (IIOT) SYSTEMS 10

The Various Industrial Revolutions, Role of Internet of Things (IOT) & Industrial Internet of
Things (IIOT) in Industry, Catalysts and Precursors of the IIOT, Miniaturization, Cyber
Physical Systems, Wireless Technology, IP Mobility, Network Functionality
Virtualization (NFV), Network Virtualization, SDN (Software Defined Networks), Smart
Phones, The Cloud and Fog, M2M Learning and Artificial Intelligence, AR,3D Printing
UNIT II IIOT REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE 8
M2M and IIOT architecture, Industrial Internet Architecture Framework (IIAF), Architectural
Topology, Key System Characteristics, Data Management. Query, Storage, Persistence, and
Retrieval Advanced Data Analytics, IIOT Middleware Architecture
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL INTERNET SYSTEM DESIGNING 9

The Concept of IIOT, Proximity Network, WSN Edge Node, Designing Low-Power Device
Networks, Modern Communication Protocols, Wireless Communication
Technologies, Proximity Network Communication, Gateways, Access Networks
Connecting Remote Edge Networks, API, Web services, SOAP and REST,
UNIT IV INDUSTRY 4.0 9
Defining Industry 4.0, Need and Characteristics of 4.0, The value chain, Differential
Prospective, Benefits to Business, Industry 4.0 Design Principles, Industry 4.0 Reference
Architecture, Smart Factories, Industry 4.0: The Way Forward
UNIT V INDUSTRY 5.0 9

Need for Industrial Transition, Challenges, Strategy planning, Business Use case, Business
Challenge, Precondition, Approach, Result, Workplace of the future
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamentals of Industrial Internet of Things and its
CO1 standards Understand
Analyze the various real time uses of different architecture in Apply
CO2 IIOT
Apply the basics of IIOT to monitor and control IIOT data and edge Apply
CO3 systems
Design a IIOT system to solve any engineering problems Apply
CO4
Analyze software design concepts for Industrial Internet of Things Analyze
CO5
Analyze the Workforce and Human Machine Interaction and Application Analyze
CO6 of Industrial Internet of Things
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things Alasdair Gilchrist Publications:
Apress,2016
2. Sabina Jeschke, Christian Brecher Houbing Song , Danda B. Rawat Editors
Industrial Internet of Things Cyber Manufacturing Systems,2016
3. Elangovan, Uthayan. Industry 5.0: The Future of the Industrial Economy. United
States, CRC Press, 2021.
REFERENCES:
1. Dr. Ovidiu Vermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, “Internet of Things: Converging Technologies
for Smart Environments and Integrated Ecosystems”, River Publishers,2022
2. The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols, ISBN: 978-1-119-

99435-0, 2nd Edition, Willy Publications,2014
3. The Concept Industry 4.0 An Empirical Analysis of Technologies and

Applications in Production Logistics Authors: Bartodziej, Christoph Jan Springer:
Publication in the field of economic science,2016
4. Hakima Chaouchi, “ The Internet of Things Connecting Objects to the Web” ISBN
: 978-1- 84821- 140-7, Willy Publications Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar
Elloumi,2010
Course Designer: Mrs.R.Devika AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 2
CO.5 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
L T P C
21ECV307 SMART SENSOR NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce basic concepts of Sensor Networks
 To understand the knowledge of programming in Sensor
Networks
 To explain the Applications in Communication fields
Unit – 1 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9

Introduction-Goals for Real-Time Distributed Network Computing for Sensor Data Fusion -The
Convergence of Networking and Real-Time Computing - Network Resource Management-
Management Challenges and Dimensions-MANNA as an
Integrating Architecture
Unit – 2 PROGRAMMING IN SENSOR NETWORK 9
Introduction-Differences between Sensor Networks and Traditional Data Networks- Aspects
of Efficient Sensor Network Applications-Need for Sensor Network Programmability- Major
Models for System-Level Programmability-Frameworks for System-Level Programmability-
Miniaturizing Sensor Networks with MEMS
Unit – 3 SENSOR NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND 9
APPLICATIONS
Introduction-Sensor Network Applications-Functional Architecture for Sensor Networks-
Sample Implementation Architectures-SNs-Global View and Requirements- Individual
Components of SN Nodes-Wireless SNs as Embedded Systems-
Comparison of Data Processing Techniques in Sensor Networks
Unit – 4 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS FOR SENSOR NETWORK 9
Introduction-Application Layer Protocols-Localization Protocols-Time Synchronization
Protocols-Transport Layer Protocols-Network Layer Protocols-Data Link Layer Protocols-
Positioning and Location Tracking in Wireless Sensor Networks
Unit – 5 DYNAMIC POWER MANAGEMENT AND SECURITIES IN 9
SENSOR NETWORKS
Introduction-Idle Power Management-Active Power Management-System Implementation-
Unique Security Challenges in Sensor Networks and Enabling Mechanisms-Security
Architectures
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the basics concepts of Sensor Networks. Understand

Describe the technology involved in Wireless Sensor
CO2 Understand
Network.
Apply the knowledge of programming in Sensor Network
CO3 Apply
for various sensor network applications
Apply the knowledge of WSN Architecture to develop
CO4 Apply
various applications.
Analyze the performance of various Communication
CO5 Analyze
protocols.
Analyze the performance of various Securities
CO6 Analyze
protocol in WSN
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohammad Ilyas, Imad Mahgoub - Smart Dust- Sensor Network Applications,
Architecture and Design
2.Fatos Xhafa, Fang-Yie Leu and Li-Ling Hung, “Smart Sensor Networks –
Communication technologies and Intelligent Application
REFERENCES:
1. Luger George F and Stubblefield William A, “Artificial Intelligence: Structures and
Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Sensors and Transducers Characteristics, Applications, Instrumentation,
Interfacing M..J. Usher and D.A. Keating
Course Designer : P.Murugeswari AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.4 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.5 2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.6 2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CAM
- - - - - - - - -
2 2 3 2 2
(Avg)

21ECV308 BLOCK CHAIN TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To describe Blockchain’s fundamental components, and examine
decentralization using blockchain.
 To introduce the components of cryptocurrency.
 To impart the knowledge blockchain on real time applications
History of Block Chain - Introduction to Block chain - Features of Block chain - Types of Block
Chain - Decentralized Database - Proof of Work – Proof of Stake - Benefits of Block Chain
Technology - Blockchain’s Challenges – Advantages and Limitations of Block Chain.
UNIT II SECURITY OF BLOCKCHAIN SYSTEMS 9

The Blockchain Architecture - Data Distribution and Structure of a Block – Layers of Security in a
Blockchain Network: Transactions, Consensus, Mining, Information Propagation and Immutability
- Blockchain Security Challenges - Distributed or Replicated - Monopoly of Miners - Double
Spending
UNIT III CRYPTOCURRENCY 9
Digital Currencies - Concept of Digital Currencies - Categories of Digital Currency - Examples of
Digital Currencies: Bitcoin, Ethereum - Advantages of Digital Currencies
- Limitations and Risks of Digital Currencies - Smart Contracts - Smart Licensing - Smart
Contract Types - Benefits of Smart Contracts - Challenges of Smart Contracts and Licensing
UNIT IV BLOCKCHAIN APPLICATIONS AND NEXT EMERGING 9

TRENDS
Blockchain in Science - Blockchain in Health Care - Recent Developments in Blockchain -
Technological Revolutions and Financial Capital – Case Study: Health, Finance, Media. -
Alternative Blockchains: Kadena, Ripple, Rootstock
UNIT V BLOCKCHAIN BUSINESS INNOVATION 9

Blockchain Practices – Loyyal: Developer - Application – Everledger: Developer, Application –
GemHealth: Developer, Application – Wave: Developer, Application – AlignCommerce: Developer,
Application – Civic: Developer, Application – ShoCard: Developer, Application – Factom:
Developer, Application.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the technology components of Blockchain and how it
CO1 Understand
works behind the scenes.
CO2 Apply the concept of blockchain technology in real time Apply

applications.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of cryptography to develop the blockchain Apply

security system.
CO4 Apply the knowledge acquired in blockchain for developing Apply

decentralized applications.
CO5 Analyze the performance of various alternative Blockchains Analyze

techniques
CO6 Analyze various blockchain business innovation models for real Analyze
time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Imran Bashir, “Mastering Blockchain Distributed ledger technology,
decentralization and smart contracts”, 2017.
2. Vincenzo Morabito, “Business Innovation through Blockchain”, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Arvind Narayanan, Joseph Bonneau, Edward Felten, Andrew Miller, Steven Goldfeder,
“Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies A Comprehensive Introduction” , 2016
2. Bellaj Badr, Richard Horrocks, Xun (Brian) Wu, “Blockchain by Example: A developer's
guide to creating decentralized applications using Bitcoin, Ethereum, and Hyperledger”,
2018.
3. Joseph J. Bambara and Paul R. Allen, “Blockchain - A Practical Guide to
Developing Business, Law, and Technology Solutions”, 2018.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
4. Vikram Dhillon, David Metcalf and Max Hooper, “Blockchain enabled
Applications”, 2017.
5. Antonopoulos, Andreas M, “Mastering Pos
bitcoin unlocking digital PSOs
CO cryptocurrencies”, 2014.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
Course Designer: Dr.M.Sheik Dawood,Professor, Prof/ECE
CO.1 2 2 2 2
CO.2 3 2 2
CO.3 3 2 2 2 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 2 2 3 2
CO.6 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
CAM
2
(Avg) 2.8 2 2 2 2 2.3

Course
Vertical IV – 21ECV400-Space Technologies
1. 21ECV401 Global Positioning and Navigation System 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV402 Remote Sensing and Information Systems 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV403 Navigation and Communication System 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV404 Satellite Communication and services 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV405 Avionics Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV406 Radar Signal Processing Technology 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV4N04 Rocketry and Space Mechanics 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV408 Design of UAV systems 3 0 0 3

21ECV401 GLOBAL POSITIONING AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental concepts of GPS.
 To give an idea about the GPS Navigation and Satellite.
 To understand the fundamentals of GPS Receiver.
UNIT 1 GPS FUNDAMENTALS 9

Introductory GPS System, Description and Technical Design, History of Satellites, Launches, Initial
Testing, Applications of GPS, Pioneers of the GPS.
UNIT II GPS NAVIGATION DATA 9

Introduction, Detailed Description of the Navigation Data Time, Satellite Clocks and Clock Errors,
Satellite Orbit And Position, Ionosphere Correction Using Measured Data.
UNIT III GPS SATELLITE AND PAYLOAD 9

Spacecraft and Navigation Payload Heritage, Navigation Payload Requirements, Block IIR Space
Vehicle Configuration, Block IIR Payload Design, Characteristics of the GPS L-Band Satellite
Antenna, Future performance Improvements.
UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF SIGNAL TRACKING THEORY 9

GPS User Equipment –System Architecture, Delay lock loop Receivers for Signal tracking,
Coherent and Non coherent Delay lock loop, Vector Delay lock loop, Processing of GPS signals-
Quasi optimal and channel Capacity .
UNIT V GPS RECEIVER 9

Generic Receiver Description, Technology Evolution, System Design Details, Receiver Software
signal Processing, Bit synchronization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the fundamental concepts and Navigation payload in Understand
GPS.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of signal tracking theory for delay estimation in Apply
a GPS system.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of GPS Receiver to compute various Apply
parameters of GPS.
CO4 Analyze the various types of Signals in GPS Analyze
communication.
CO5 Analyze the different navigation solution for precise position. Analyze
CO6 Develop an android mobile application using GPS. Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. G.S.RAO, “Global Navigation Satellite Systems”, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Rajat Acharya, “Understanding Satellite Navigation”, Academic Press, 1st edition,
2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Parkinson.B, Spilker.J, “GPS:Theory and Applications”, Vol.I & Vol.II, AIAA,370 L'Enfant
Promenade SW, Washington, DC 20024, 1996.
2. Hoffman.B, Wellenhof, Lichtenegger.H and Collins.J, “GPS: Theory and Practice”, Springer,
Wein, 4th revised edition, New York, 1997.
3. Leick.A, “GPS Satellites Surveying”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition, NewYork, 1995.
Course Designer: Ms.J.JUDITH AP/ECE
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO5 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO6 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 2 2 -
CAM 2.8 2.6 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 2 2 -

21ECV402 REMOTE SENSING AND INFORMATION L T P C
SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3
 To introduce the basic concepts of remote sensing
 To discuss EMR interaction with earth atmosphere
 To impart the knowledge of optical &Microwave Remote sensing and its application
 To impart the knowledge on GIS
.
UNIT I REMOTE SENSING 9
Definition – Components of Remote Sensing – Energy, Sensor, Interacting Body

– Active and Passive Remote Sensing – Platforms – Aerial and Space Platforms
– Balloons, Helicopters, Aircraft and Satellites – Synoptivity and Repetivity – Electro
Magnetic Radiation (EMR) – EMR spectrum – Visible, Infra Red (IR), Near IR, Middle IR,
Thermal IR and Microwave – Black Body Radiation – Planck’s law
– Stefan-Boltzman law.
UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH 9
MATERIALS
Atmospheric characteristics – Scattering of EMR – Raleigh, Mie, Non-selective and Raman
Scattering – EMR Interaction with Water vapour and ozone – Atmospheric Windows –
Significance of Atmospheric windows – EMR interaction with Earth Surface Materials –
Radiance, Irradiance, Incident, Reflected, Absorbed and Transmitted Energy – Reflectance
–Specular and Diffuse Reflection Surfaces- Spectral Signature – Spectral Signature curves
–EMR
interaction with water, soil and Earth Surface: Imaging spectrometry and spectral
characteristics.
UNIT III OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE REMOTE SENSING 9

Satellites - Classification – Based on Orbits and Purpose – Satellite Sensors - Resolution –
Description of Multi Spectral Scanning – Along and Across Track Scanners – Description of
Sensors in Landsat, SPOT, IRS series – Current Satellites - Radar – Speckle - Back Scattering–
Side Looking Airborne Radar – Synthetic Aperture
Radar – Radiometer – Geometrical characteristics; Sonar remote sensing systems.
UNIT IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
GIS – Components of GIS – Hardware, Software and Organizational Context – Data –
Spatial and Non-Spatial - COORDINATE SYSTEMS: Geographic Coordinate system;
Approximation of Earth, Datum:– Maps – Types of Maps – Projection – Types of Projection
- Data Input –Digitizer, Scanner – Editing – Raster and Vector data structures – Comparison
of Raster and Vector data structure – Analysis using Raster and Vector data – Retrieval,
Reclassification,Overlaying, Buffering – Data Output – Printers and Plotters
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Visual Interpretation of Satellite Images – Elements of Interpretation - Interpretation Keys
Characteristics of Digital Satellite Image – Image enhancement – Filtering – Classification -
Integration of GIS and Remote Sensing – Application of Remote Sensing and GIS – Urban
Applications- Water resources – Urban Analysis – Watershed Management – Resources
Information Systems, Introduction to Global positioning system.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the components of remote sensing and various
CO1 EMR spectrum(K2) Understand
Discuss Multi Spectral Scanning and Sensors in

CO2 LANDSAT(K2) Understand
Apply the concepts of Electro Magnetic energy,

CO3 spectrum and spectral signature curves in the practical Apply
problems.(K3)
CO4 Apply the concepts of DBMS in GIS(K3) Apply
Analyze raster and vector data and modeling in GIS(K4)
CO5 Analyze
Simulate Satellite image enhancement algorithms using

CO6 Analyze
MATLAB (K4)(Modern Tool Usage
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.G. Srinivas, “Remote Sensing Applications”, Narosa Publishing House, first edition
2001.
2. Reddy, Anji., M.,” Textbook of Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems”
3rd Edition, BS Publications, Hyderabad, India,2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Jensen, J.R, “Remote sensing of the environment”, Prentice Hall, 2000.
2. Kang-Tsung Chang, “Introduction to Geographic Information Systems”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2002.
3. Lillesand T.M. and Kiefer R.W, “Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation”, John Wiley
and Sons, Inc, New York, 1987.
4. Burrough P A, “Principle of GIS for land resource assessment”, Oxford MischaelHord,
1986
Course Designer: Mrs.A.Shakin Banu, AP/ECE

CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - 2 2 3 - 3 2
CO.2 3 - - 2 2 2 - 3 2
CO.3 3 - - - 2 2 2 - 3 2
CO.4 3 - - 2 2 2 - 3 2
CO.5 3 3 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 3 2
CO.6 3 3 2 - 3 2 2 2 - 3 2
CAM
3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2.16 - 3 2
(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV403 NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
 To understand the principles, operation and maintenance of aircraft
communications and navigation systems.
 To study the range of navigation systems used on modern transport and military
aircraft.
 To learn about the computation of navigation data and advancement in inertial
navigation.
UNIT I Introduction to Antennas and navigation 9

The isotropic radiator-The half-wave dipole-Radiated power and efficiency-Antenna gain-The
Yagi beam antenna-Directional characteristics-Other practical antennas- Aircraft navigation-
The earth and navigation-Dead Reckoning-Position Fixing- Navigation terminology -
Navigation systems development-Automatic direction finder- Introducing ADF-ADF principles
and equipment-Operational aspects of AD.
UNIT II Hyperbolic radio navigation and Doppler navigation 9

Hyperbolic position fixing-Loran overview, operation, ground equipment Enhanced Loran
(eLoran)- The Doppler effect - Doppler navigation principles - Airborne equipment overview -
Typical Doppler installations - Doppler summary - Other Doppler applications
UNIT III Advancements of Aircraft navigation 9
RNAV equipment Kalman Filters-Navigation Performance-Inertial navigation systems-
Inertial navigation principles-System overview and description - Alignment process - Inertial
navigation accuracy - System integration
UNIT IV Global navigation satellite system 9
GPS overview-Principles of wave propagation-Satellite navigation principles-GPS segments-
GPS signals-GPS operation-Flight management systems - FMS overview - Flight
management computer system initialization- FMCS operation
UNIT V Air traffic control and collision avoidance 9
ATC overview - ATC transponder modes - Airborne equipment - System operation - Automatic
dependent surveillance-broadcast Communications, navigation and surveillance/air traffic
management.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the concept of space navigation systems
CO1 ranges, working principles and operational purposes. Understand
Apply the concept of doppler effect for various doppler Apply

CO2 applications
Apply the concept of inertial navigation system and Apply
CO3 global satellite systems to compute the navigation data.
Analyze the propagation types of radio waves and Analyze

CO4 their relations with radio frequency.
Analyze the navigation methods to augment their Analyze
CO5 precision and range of use.
Evaluate the operational limitations of aircraft based air Evaluate

CO6 navigation systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike Tooley and David Wyatt, “Aircraft Navigation and communication
systems”, Routledge, 2nd edition, 2017.
2. Chris Binns, “Aircraft Systems: Instruments, Communications, Navigation, and
Control”, 2018, Wiley Press.
REFERENCES:
1. Mohinder S. Grewal,“Global Navigation Satellite Systems, Inertial Navigation, and
Integration”, 3rd Edition,2017.
2. Michael H. Tooley, Mike Tooley, David Wyatt,“Aircraft Communications and
Navigation Systems”, 1st edition, 2016.
Course Designer: S.Ramya AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO.4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO.5 2 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 2 -
CO.6 3 3 3 2 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 2 -
CAM 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 2 -

L T P C
21ECV404 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION AND SERVICES
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the elements of satellite Communication.
 To explain the modulation and multiple access schemes.
 To summarize about satellites and its applications
ELEMENTS OF SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 9

UNIT 1
Satellite Systems, Orbital description and Orbital mechanics of LEO, MEO and GSO,
Placement of a Satellite in a GSO, Satellite – description of different Communication
subsystems, Bandwidth allocation.
UNIT II TRANSMISSION, MODULATION, MULTIPLE ACCESS 9

Phased arrays for satellite communications, satellite laser communications, Features of RF and
optical space communication systems, wireless standards in satellite networking, Tracking and
Data Relay Satellite K (TDRS-K) , Multiple Access Techniques – DMA, TDMA, CDMA, and
DAMA.
UNIT III SATELLITE LINK DESIGN 9
The Space Segment: The Power Supply, Attitude Control, Station Keeping, Thermal
Control,TT&C Subsystem ,Transponders, The Antenna Subsystem, The Space Link:
Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power, Transmission Losses, The Link-Power Budget Equation,
System Noise, Carrier-to-Noise Ratio, The Uplink, Downlink, Effects of Rain,
Combined Uplink and Downlink C/N Ratio, Intermodulation Noise, Inter-Satellite Links
SATELLITE NAVIGATION AND GLOBAL POSITIONING 9
UNIT IV
SYSTEM
Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Position Location Principles, GPS Receivers and Codes,
Satellite Signal Acquisition, GPS Receiver Operation and Differential GPS.
UNIT V SERVICES AND APPLICATIONS 9
Mixed and mobile services - Multimedia satellite services - Advanced applications based on
satellite platforms - INTELSAT series ,Remote Sensing - Special services, E-mail, Video
conferencing and Internet connectivity ,Mission Chandrayan and Mission Mangalyaan.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamental concepts of satellite Understand
CO1
communication.
Apply various modulation techniques and interference
Apply
CO2 involved in satellite communication
Apply the knowledge of GPS to describe the satellite Apply
CO3
Navigation.
CO4 Illustrate various services in satellite communication.
Apply
CO5 Analyze the various interference in satellite link design
Analyze
Design real time applications for satellite
CO6 Create
communication.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Wilbur Pritchard.L,Suyderhoud.H.D,RobertNelson.A, “ Satellite Communication Systems
Engineering ”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian.W, “ Satellite Communications ”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
2. Roddy.D, “ Satellite Communication ”, McGrawHill, 2008.
3. Tri T Ha, “ Digital Satellite Communication ”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
Course Designer: Mr. P.SELVAPRASANTH AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CAM 2 2
(Avg) 3 . 3 . 2 2 2.5
5 5

21ECV405 AVIONICS SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts.
 To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data
buses.
 To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems.
 To impart knowledge on feedback systems.
 To gain knowledge in the field of navigation systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9
Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – Integrated avionics and
weapon systems – Typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to
Digital Computer and memories.
UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9
Avionics system architecture – Data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 429 – ARINC –

629 – AFDX.
UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9
Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen –
Direct voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9
Radio navigation – Dead – Reckoning systems, Hyperbolic Navigation - ILS, MLS – Inertial
Navigation Systems (INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation
systems – GPS.
UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9
Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach number, Auto pilot – Basic
principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basics of avionics and its

CO1 Understand
subsystems.
CO2 Apply the basics of avionics subsystems
architecture to calculate the air data parameters. Apply
CO3 Apply the knowledge of display technologies on avionic

Apply
systems to measure the parameters.
CO4 Analyze the principle of avionics for the needs of civil and Analyze
military avionics systems.
CO5 Analyze Digital avionics systems from analog avionics Analyze
architecture.
CO6 Design navigation system and to perform analysis on air data Create
systems using open source platform.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Albert Helfrick.D., Principles of Avionics, Avionics Communications Inc., 7th
Edition,
2012.
2. Collinson.R.P.G. Introduction to Avionics, Chapman and Hall, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical,
Longman Group UK Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Pallet.E.H.J., Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems, Longman
Scientific,1992.
3. Spitzer, C.R. Digital Avionics Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.,U.S.A. 1993.
4. Spitzer. C.R. The Avionics HandBook, CRC Press, 2000.
Course Designer:
Ms.A.Jansi Rani [AP/ECE]
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 -
CO.2 3 1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO.3 3 1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO.4 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO.5 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO.6 3 2 3 - 3 2 1 - - - - 2 3 -
CAM 3 2 2.4 - 2.5 2 1 - - - - 2.2 3 -

(Avg)

21ECV406 RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
 To study about different radar signal processing techniques such as matched
filtering, modeling, signal detection etc.
 To familiarize the concept of matched filter techniques to identify the moving
targets.
 To study the Pulsed RADAR signals for sampling and quantization.
UNIT I RADAR SIGNAL MODEL 9

Basics of RADAR - Components of RADAR Signal: Amplitude, Clutter, Noise and
Jamming - RADAR Signal Frequency model: Doppler Shift, Stop and Hop
Approximation - Spatial model: Coherent and Non coherent scattering, Variation with Angle
and Range.
UNIT II RADAR DATA ACQUISITION 9
RADAR Signal Sampling: Sampling in Fast and Slow Time Dimension; Sampling Doppler
Spectrum - Nyquist Rate, Straddle Loss; Sampling in Spatial and Angle
Dimension - Spatial Array Sampling, Sampling in Angle; I/Q Imbalance and Corrections
UNIT III RADAR WAVEFORMS 9

The Waveform Matched Filter, Matched Filtering for Moving Targets, The Ambiguity
Function, The Pulse Burst Waveform, Frequency Modulated-Pulse Compressed Waveform,
Range Sidelobe Control for FM waveforms, Costas Frequency Codes.
UNIT IV DOPPLER PROCESSING 9
Moving Target Indication(MTI),Pulse Doppler Processing, Pulse Pair Processing, Additional
Doppler Processing issues, Clutter Mapping and Moving Target Detector, MTI for moving
platforms.
UNIT V TRACKING AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Signal Reprocessing Operation - Target Range Track Detection Using Surveillance Radar
Data: Statistical Analysis of False Target Range and True Target Range Detection -
Target Track Parameter measurement: Recurrent Filtering Algorithm, Adaptive Filtering
Algorithm.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the basic concept of Radar systems
CO1 Understand
Compare the various techniques to process the RADAR Understand

CO2 signals
Apply the knowledge of sampling concepts to process Apply

CO3 the pulsed RADAR signals.
Apply the knowledge of matched filter techniques to Apply

CO4 identify the moving targets
Apply the concept of detection techniques to identify the Apply

CO5 unknown interference.
Analyze the performance of the radar system both in Analyze
CO6 detection and tracking modes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark.A.Richards, “Fundamentals of RADAR signal Processing”,McGraw Hill,2005.
2. Vyacheslav Tuzlukov, “Signal Processing in RADAR systems”,CRC press,2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Harry L.Van Trees, “Detection,Estimation and Modulation Theory –
RADAR,SONAR signal processing and Gaussian signals in noise”,2001.
2. Nadav Levanon, Eli Mozeson, “RADAR SIGNALS”, Wiley Interscience, 2004
Course Designer: Mr.T.Muthuraja, AP/ECE
CO PO 1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 6 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 -
CA M 2.6 2.6 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 -
L T P C
21ECV4N04 ROCKETRY AND SPACE MECHANICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concept of orbital mechanics and satellite dynamics.
 To explain the properties of rocket motion and aerodynamics
 To Understand the recent trends in staging and control of rocket vehicles.
UNIT 1 ORBITAL MECHANICS 9
Description of solar system – Kepler’s Laws of planetary motion – Newton’s Law of Universal
gravitation – Two body and Three-body problems – Jacobi’s Integral, Librations points -
Estimation of orbital and escape velocities
UNIT II SATELLITE DYNAMICS 9

Geosynchronous and geostationary satellites- factors determining life time of satellites –
satellite perturbations – methods to calculate perturbations- Hohmann orbits –
calculation of orbit arameters – Determination of satellite rectangular coordinates from
orbital elements
UNIT III ROCKET MOTION 9
Principle of operation of rocket motor - thrust equation – one dimensional and two
dimensional rocket motions in free space and homogeneous gravitational fields – Description
of vertical, inclined and gravity turn trajectories determinations of range and altitude – simple
approximations to burnout velocity.
UNIT IV ROCKET AERODYNAMICS 9
Description of various loads experienced by a rocket passing through atmosphere – drag
estimation – wave drag, skin friction drag, form drag and base pressure drag –
Boat-tailing in missiles – performance at various altitudes – conical and bell shaped nozzles
– adapted nozzles – rocket dispersion – launching problems.
UNIT V STAGING AND CONTROL OF ROCKET VEHICLES 9
Need for multistaging of rocket vehicles – multistage vehicle optimization – stage separation
dynamics and separation techniques- aerodynamic and jet control methods of rocket
vehicles - SITVC.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
To understand the advanced concepts in Rocketry and
CO1 Understand
Space Mechanics to the engineers
Analyze mathematical knowledge that are needed in
CO2 Analyze
understanding the physical processes
Derive numeric problems related to satellite
CO3 Apply
perturbations
Process trajectories determinations of range and
CO4 Analyze
altitude for analytics purpose
CO5 performance at various altitudes Apply
Design aerodynamic and jet control methods of
CO6 Apply
rocket vehicles
TEXT BOOKS:
1. 1. G.P. Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 5th
Edition, 1986.
2. 2. J.W. Cornelisse, “Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”, J.W. Freeman & Co.,
Ltd., London,1982
REFERENCES:
1. Van de Kamp, “Elements of astromechanics”, Pitman Publishing Co., Ltd., London,

1980.
2. 4. E.R. Parker, “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc.,
1982.
Course Designer: Mr.S.Selvakumar , AP/ECE
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 -
CO2 3 1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO3 3 1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO4 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO5 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO6 3 2 3 - 3 2 1 - - - - 2 3 -
CAM
3 2 2.4 - 2.5 2 1 - - - - 2.2 3 -
(Avg)
L T P C
21ECV408 DESIGN OF UAV SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of unmanned aerial vehicles.

 To make students familiarize with the design aspects of UAV.
 To impart knowledge on the hardware components and their application in the UAV
systems.
 To infer about the communication and control detail of UAV.
 To introduce the basic operational futures of UAV systems.
Unit–1 INTRODUCTION to UAV 9

History of UAV –classification – Introduction to Unmanned Aircraft Systems- models and
prototypes – System Composition-applications.
Unit–2 UAV STANDARDS 9
Introduction to Design and Selection of the System- Aerodynamics and Airframe

Configurations- Characteristics of Aircraft Types- Design Standards and Regulatory Aspects-
UK,USA and Europe- Design for Stealth–control surfaces specifications.
Unit–3 AVIONICS HARDWARE 9
Autopilot – AGL-pressure sensors-servos-accelerometer –gyros-actuators- power supply-
processor, integration, installation, configuration, and testing.
Unit–4 Communication Payloads and Controls 9
Payloads-Telemetry-tracking-Aerial photography-controls-PID feedback-radio control
frequency range –modems-memory system-simulation-ground test-analysis-trouble shooting.
Unit–5 Development of UAV Systems 9
Waypoints navigation-ground control software- System Ground Testing- System In-flight

Testing-Future Prospects and Challenges-Case Studies – Mini and Micro UAVs.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Acquire knowledge on the importance of UAVs with respect to Understand

their Applications.
Identify the various subsystems and configurations of UAV. Apply
CO2
Distinguish between needs of mini and micro UAVs. Apply

CO3
CO4 Analyze the Gain insights with design standards and Analyze
regulatory aspects of UAVs.
CO5 Design micro aerial vehicle systems by considering practical Evaluate
limitations.
Evaluate the Perform ground test and troubleshooting with respect Create
CO6 to UAV operation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul G Fahlstrom, Thomas J Gleason, Introduction to UAV Systems, UAV
Systems, Inc, 1998
2. Reg Austin Unmanned Aircraft Systems UAV design, development and
deployment, Wiley, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Dr. Armand J. Chaput, Design of Unmanned Air Vehicle Systems, Lockheed

Martin Aeronautics Company, 2001
2. Kimon P. Valavanis, Advances in Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: State of the Art
and the Road to Autonomy, Springer, 2007
3. Robert C. Nelson, Flight Stability and Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1998.
Course Designer: Rajalakshmi J, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 2
CO.2 3 2 3 3
CO.3 3 3 3 3
CO.4 3 2 2 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3 3
CO.6 2 3 3 2 2 3 2
CAM
2.6 2.4 2 3 2 2 3 2.6
(Avg)

Course
Vertical V – 21ECV500 - Semiconductor Chip Design and Testing
1. 21ECV501 Device Modeling 3 0 0 3
2. 21ECV502 Validation and Testing Technology 3 0 0 3
3. 21ECV503 Low Power VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV504 VLSI Design and Testing 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV505 Mixed Signal Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV506 Analog CMOS Circuit Design 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV507 Microelectronics and VLSI Design Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV5N05 ASIC & FPGA based Design 3 0 0 3

L T P C
21ECV501 DEVICE MODELING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart the knowledge of MOS models and their second order effects
● To describe the methods for analyzing MOSFET scaling
● To introduce the concept of Quantum phenomena in MOS transistors
UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR MODEL 9
MOS Transistor operation, Equivalent circuit representation of MOS Transistor, Types of Compact
Model, Basic modeling, Advanced MOSFET modeling, RF modeling of MOS transistors- Charge
model, Quasi and non-Quasi static model.
UNIT II MOS SECOND ORDER EFFECT 9
Review of MOSFET Current Equation - MOSFET Channel Mobility- MOSFET capacitances and
Inversion- Layer Capacitance effect - Short Channel MOSFETs
UNIT III MOSFET DEVICE SCALING 9
Constant-Field scaling – Generalized Scaling – Non scaling Effects- Threshold-Voltage
Requirement – Channel Profile Design – Non-uniform Doping – Quantum Effect on Threshold
Voltage – Discrete Dopant Effects on Threshold Voltage- MOSFET Channel Length.
UNIT IV QUANTUM EFFECTS IN MOS TRANSISTORS 9
Carrier Energy Quantization in MOS capacitor-2-D Density of States- Electron Concentration
Distribution-Approximate Methods- Quantization Correction in Compact MOSFET Models-
Quantum Tunneling-Gate Current Density-Compact Gate Current Models-Gate Induced Drain
Leakage (GIDL)
UNIT V MOS DEVICE STRUCTURES 9
Silicon-On-Insulator Devices – SOI CMOS – Partially Depleted SOI MOSFETs – Fully
Depleted SOI MOSFETs- Dual Material Gate MOSFETs, Surrounding Gate MOSFETs -
Multigate MOSFETs- FINFETs- HEMTs – Silicon Nanowires – Junction less FETs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain in detail about the different modeling of MOS
Understand
Transistor
Apply the concept of quantum phenomena in MOS
CO2 Apply
Transistors models
Apply the technologies used in non-classical MOSFET
CO3 Apply
structure in real time applications
Apply the concept of device modeling to differentiate Non-
CO4 Apply
classical and Multigate MOSFET.
CO5 Analyze the different types of MOSFET Scaling Analyze
CO6 Analyze long channel and short channel MOSFET devices Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Y. Taur and T.H. Ning, “Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices”,
CambridgeUniversity Press, Cambridge, United Kingdom, 2015
2. A.B.Bhattacharyya , “ Compact MOSFET Models for VLSI Design”, John Wiley
&Sons Ltd, 2009
REFERENCES:
1. Trond Ytterdal, Yuhua Cheng and Tor A. Fjeldly Wayne Wolf, “Device Modeling
forAnalog and RF CMOS Circuit Design”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
2. Snowden C. M., “Introduction to Semiconductor Device Modeling”, World Scientific Press,
Singapore, 1986
3. J.P.Colinge, “FinFETs and other MultigateTransistors”, 2007.
Course Designer: Dr.I.Sheik Arafat
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 2 2
CO.5 3 3 3
CO.6 3 3 3 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 3 3 2 2.3
L T P C
21ECV502 VALIDATION AND TESTING TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
⮚ To involve the students in the theory and practice of VLSI test and validations.
⮚ To introduce advanced techniques for efficiently testing and validating the VLSI
design.
⮚ To introduce the concept of Design for Test and the technique of automated test
pattern generation.
UNIT 1 Introduction to VLSI Testing 9
Introduction - VLSI Testing Process and Test Equipment – Challenges in VLSI Testing -
Test Economics and Product Quality – Fault Modelling- Relationship among fault models.
UNIT II Test Generation for Combinational and Sequential Circuits 9
Test generation for combinational logic circuits - Testable combinational logic circuit design -
Sequential ATPG Algorithms – Simulation Based ATPG – Genetic Algorithm Based ATPG
UNIT III Advanced Testing 9
Memory Test- Memory Density and Defect Trends, Faults memory test Delay Test- IDDQ
Test
UNIT IV Design for Testability 9
Design for Testability - Ad-hoc design - Storage cells for scan designs - Generic scan based
design - System level DFT approaches
UNIT V Self-Test and Test Algorithms 9
Built-In Self-Test - Test pattern generation for BIST - Circular BIST – BIST Architectures -
Testable Memory Design - Test algorithms - Test generation for Embedded RAMs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 VLSI Testing methodologies with the equipment‟s and tools. Understand
CO2 Able to identify and analyze the yield of chips. Analyze
CO3 To construct a Design for Testability (DFT) algorithm for VLSI Apply
Circuits
CO4 Apply a methodology to test the combinational and Apply
sequential circuits.
CO5 Able to design any testable combinational logic circuit. Apply
CO6 Perform Fault Diagnosis Apply
TEXT BOOKS:
Viswani D.Agarval Michael L.Bushnell, “Essentials of Electronic Testing forDigitalMemo
L. T. Wang, C. W. Wu, and X. Wen, VLSI Test Principles and Architectures, Morgan,200
REFERENCES:
Kaufmann Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006 M. Abramovici, M.A. Breuer and A.D. Fr
Alfred L.Crouch “Design for Test for Digital IC‟s And Embedded Core
Systems “, -PHI 1999
COURSE DESIGNER: Dr.V.Gopi Prof/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 2
CO.6 3 2 2 2
CAM
2.5 2 2 2 2 2
(Avg)

21ECV503 LOW POWER VLSI SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the concepts of power in an IC.
● To Identify the power reduction techniques based on technology independent and
technology dependent methods
● To explain the suitable techniques to reduce the power dissipation.
UNIT I POWER DISSIPATION IN CMOS 9

Hierarchy of limits of power – Sources of power consumption – Physics of power dissipation in
CMOS FET devices – Basic principle of low power design.
UNIT II POWER OPTIMIZATION 9

Logic level power optimization – Circuit level low power design – Gate level low power design
– Architecture level low power design – VLSI subsystem design of adders, multipliers,PLL, low power
design.
UNIT III DESIGN OF LOW POWER CMOS CIRCUITS 9

Computer arithmetic techniques for low power system – reducing power consumption in
combinational logic, sequential logic, memories – low power clock – Advanced techniques – Special
techniques, Adiabatic techniques – Physical design, Floor planning, placement and routing.
UNIT IV POWER ESTIMATION 9

Power Estimation techniques, circuit level, gate level, architecture level, behavioral level, – logic
power estimation – Simulation power analysis –Probabilistic power analysis.
UNIT V SYNTHESIS AND SOFTWARE DESIGN FOR LOW POWER 9

Synthesis for low power – Behavioral level transform –Algorithms for low power – software
design for low power.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the sources of power dissipation in digital IC Systems.
CO1 Understand
Design of low power CMOS circuits Apply
CO2
Apply probabilistic analysis to characterize dynamic power Apply
CO3 estimation
Examine various power optimization algorithms in low power Analyze

CO4 VLSI design system
Analyze various techniques for low power dissipation Analyze

CO5
Develop algorithm to reduce power dissipation by software Create
CO6
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kaushik Roy and S.C.Prasad, “Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design”, Wiley, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. J.B.Kulo and J.H Lou, “Low voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, Wiley 1999.
2. A.P.Chandrasekaran and R.W.Broadersen, “Low power digital CMOS design”,
Kluwer,1995.
3. Gary Yeap, “Practical low power digital VLSI design”, Kluwer, 1998.
4. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer
Academic, 2002
Course Designer: D JOHN PRAGASAM, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 3 2
CO.2 2 3 2
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 2 3 2
CO.5 3 2 2
CO.6 2 3 2
CAM 2
2.5 3 2
(Avg)

L T P C
21ECV504 VLSI DESIGN AND TESTING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics of VLSI testing concepts
 To impart the knowledge to Learn test generation for sequential and combinational logic
circuit
 To Understand logic fault models
UNIT I TESTING AND FAULT MODELING 9

Introduction to testing – Faults in Digital Circuits – Modeling of faults – Logical Fault Models
–Fault detection – Fault Location – Fault dominance – Logic simulation – Types of simulation –
Delay models – Gate Level Event – driven simulation.
UNIT II TEST GENERATION 9

Test generation for combinational logic circuits – Testable combinational logic circuit design
– Test generation for sequential circuits – Design of testable sequential circuits.
UNIT III DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY 9

Design for Testability – Ad-hoc design – Generic scan based design – Classical scan based design–
System level DFT approaches.
UNIT IV SELF – TEST AND TEST ALGORITHMS 9

Built-In self-test – Test pattern generation for BIST – Circular BIST – BIST Architectures – Testable
Memory Design – Test Algorithms – Test generation for Embedded RAMs.
UNIT V FAULT DIAGNOSIS 9

Logical Level Diagnosis – Diagnosis by Unit under test reduction – Fault Diagnosis for
Combinational Circuits– Self-checking design – System Level Diagnosis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of VLSI testing
Apply the BIST techniques for improving testability. Apply

CO2
Apply the testing concepts to design suitable IC for low
Apply
CO3 power applications.
Illustrate testability techniques for combinational and
Apply
CO4 sequential circuits.
Analyze the various methods of testing for combinational & sequential
CO5 Analyze
circuits
Analyze the various test generation methods for static & dynamic
CO6 Analyze
CMOS circuits
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.L.Crouch, “Design Test for Digital IC‟s and Embedded Core Systems”, Prentice Hall
International, 2002.
2. M.Abramovici, M.A.Breuer and A.D. Friedman, “Digital systems and Testable
Design”, Jaico Publishing House, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. M.L.Bushnell and V.D.Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.
2. P.K. Lala, “Digital Circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press, 2002.
Course Designer: Mr.B.Michael Vinoline Rinoj AP\ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21ECV505 MIXED SIGNAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To Study the mixed signal of submicron CMOS circuits

● To Understand the various integrated based filters and topologies
● To Learn the data converters architecture, modeling and signal to noise ratio
UNIT I SUBMICRON CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN AND MODELING OF 9

VERILOG HDL
Submicron CMOS: Overview and Models, CMOS process flow, Capacitors and Resistors. Digital circuit
design: The MOSFET Switch, Delay Elements, An Adder. Analog Circuit Design: Biasing, Op-Amp
Design, Circuit Noise. Basic concepts-Gate level modeling- Dataflow modeling- Behavioral modeling-
Design examples of Combinational and Sequential circuits.
UNIT II INTEGRATOR BASED CMOS FILTERS 9
Integrator Building Blocks , Low pass Filters, Active-RC Integrators, MOSFET-C Integrators, gm- C
(Transconductor-C) Integrators, Discrete-Time Integrators, Filtering Topologies, Filtering Topologies, The
Ideal ADC, Sinc-Shaped Digital Filters, Filtering Topologies.
UNIT III DATA CONVERTER ARCHITECTURES 9
Quantization Noise, Quantization Noise Voltage Spectral Density, Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR), Clock
Jitter, Tool: The Spectral Density, Improving SNR using Averaging, The One-Bit ADC and DAC, Passive
Noise-Shaping, Improving SNR and Linearity, Introduction to ASICs, ASIC Design Flow, Scan design
UNIT IV DATA CONVERTER MODELING 9
First-Order Noise Shaping, Quantization Noise in a First-Order Modulator, Decimating and

Filtering the Output of a NS Modulator, Pattern Noise from DC Inputs, Op-Amp Gain (Integrator
Leakage), Second-Order Noise-Shaping, Second-Order Modulator Topology, Noise-Shaping Topologies,
Cascaded Modulators.
UNIT V CLOCK SIGNAL AND FILTERING 9
Continuous-Time Bandpass Noise-Shaping, Active-Component Bandpass Modulators ,Switched-

Capacitor Bandpass Noise-Shaping, Clock Signals Path Settling Time, Filtering, Understanding the Clock
Signals, Practical Implementation, Generating the Clock Signals, The Switched- Capacitors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basics concepts of Submicron CMOS Circuits. Understand
CO2 Apply the filtering topology concepts for designing digital filter. Apply
CO3 Design various data converters architecture using Mos Transistors. Apply
CO4 Design a filter using different data converter methods. Apply

Analyze the different modulation techniques for design ordering modulation.
CO5 Analyze
CO6 Analyze the various SNR for different modelling of mixed signals. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Jacob Baker, Wiley india “CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design” IEEE Press, reprint 2008.
2. Behzad Razavi “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits” McGraw Hill, 33rd Re- print, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Jacob Baker, Wiley India “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation” IEEE
Press,Second Edition, reprint 2009.
2. Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, Robert G. Meyer, Analysis
andDesign of Analog Integrated Circuits, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2009.
Course Designer: Mr.S.Janarthanan AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO.5 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3
CO.6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3
CAM
2.8 2.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2.3
(Avg)

21ECV506 ANALOG CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To study the fundamentals of analog circuits and MOS device models.
● To gain knowledge on various configurations of MOS transistors and
feedback concepts.
● To study the characteristics of noise and frequency response of the amplifier.
● To learn the concepts of Op-Amp frequency compensation, capacitor
switches and PLLs
UNIT I ANALOG IC DESIGN, MOS DEVICE MODEL AND 9

CURRENT MIRRORS
MOSFET basics - Concepts of Analog Design - General consideration of MOS devices
–MOS I/V Characteristics – Second order effects – MOS device models. Basic current mirrors-
Cascode current mirrors- Active current mirrors- large and small signal analysis- Commonmode
properties.
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK 9
Basic Concepts – Common source stage- Source follower- Common gate stage- Cascode stage.
Single ended and differential operation- Basic Differential pair- Common mode response-
Differential pair with MOS loads- Gilbert Cell. Feedback- General Consideration of feedback
circuits- Feedback topologies- Effect of loading- Effect of feedback on Noise.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS AND NOISE 9

General considerations- Miller Effect and Association of Poles with Nodes, Common source stage-
Source followers- Common gate stage- Cascode stage- Differential pair. Noise- Statistical
characteristics of noise- Types of noise- Representation of noise in circuits- Noise in single stage
amplifiers- Noise in differential pairs- Noise Bandwidth.
UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER STABILITY AND 9

FREQUENCYCOMPENSATION
General Considerations- One and Two Stage Op Amps- Gain Boosting- Comparison- Common
mode feedback- Input range limitations- Slew rate- Power Supply Rejection- Noise in Op Amps-
General consideration of stability and frequency compensation- Multipole system- Phase margin-
Frequency compensation- Compensation of two stage op Amps-
Other compensation techniques.
UNIT V SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS AND PLLS 9
General Considerations- Sampling switches- Switched Capacitor Amplifiers- Switched Capacitor
Integrator- Switched Capacitor Common mode feedback. Phase Locked Loops- Simple PLL-
Charge pump PLLs - Non ideal Effects in PLLs- Delay locked loops- its Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Concepts of Analog MOS devices and current mirror Understand

circuits.
Design different configurations of Amplifiers and feedback Apply
CO2 circuits.
Analyze the characteristics of frequency response of the Analyze

CO3 amplifier and its noise.
Analyze the performance of the stability and frequency Analyze

CO4 compensation techniques of Op- Amp Circuits.
Apply other compensation Techniques. Apply

CO5
Construct a switched capacitor circuit and PLLs Apply
CO6
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behzad Razavi, ―”Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits‖, Tata
McGrawHill”, 2001, 33rd re-print, 2016.
2. Philip E. Allen, Douglas R Holberg – “CMOS Analog Circuit design”,
OxfordUniversity Press, 2012, Third Edition
REFERENCES:
1. Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, Robert G. Meyer, Analysis
andDesign of Analog Integrated Circuits, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2009.
2. Grebene, ―Bipolar and MOS Analog Integrated circuit design‖, John Wiley &
sons,Inc., 2003
Course Designer: Dr.V. Gopi, Professor / ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I
CO1 2 - - - – - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - -- - 2
CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - -- - - 2
CO4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - -- - 2
CO5 3 - - - - - - - - -- - - - 2
CO6 3 - - - - - - - - -- - - - 2
CAM
2.5 2 2 - - - - - - - - -- - 2
(Avg)
L T P C
21ECV507 MICROELECTRONICS AND VLSI DESIGN 3 0 0 3
TECHNOLOGY
OBJECTIVE:
 To Impart Knowledge on physics of semiconductors and quantitative models.
 To understand the basics of semiconductor crystal properties, IC fabrication and
automation.
 To identify the issues at various stages of VLSI physical design involved in
fabrications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS 9

MEMS and Microsystems, Miniaturization, Typical products, Micro sensors, Micro actuation, MEMS
with micro actuators, Micro acceloro meters and Micro fluidics, MEMS materials, Micro fabrication
UNIT II MECHANICS FOR MEMS DESIGN 9

Elasticity, Stress, strain and material properties, Bending of thin plates, Spring
configurations,torsional deflection, Mechanical vibration, Resonance, Thermo mechanics – actuators,
force and response time, Fracture and thin film mechanics
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO VLSI FABRICATION 9

BJT and CMOS Fabrication Process a Brief Overview – Unit Process Steps in Planar Process.
Environment for VLSI Technology: Clean Room and Safety Requirements. Wafer Cleaning
Processes and Wet Chemical Etching Techniques, Silicon Crystal Growth, Epitaxy
– VPE and MBE.
UNIT IV OXIDATION AND DIFFUSION 9
Oxidation: Kinetics of Silicon Dioxide Growth for Thick and Thin Films – Oxidation Rate
Constants- Dopant Redistribution and Oxide Charges - Characterization of Oxide Films - Impurity
Diffusion: Solid State Diffusion Modelling and Technology - Characterization of Impurity Profiles-
Diffusion Systems - Ion Implantation Modeling and Technology – Damage Annealing – Masking
during Implantation.
UNIT V LITHOGRAPHY AND ETCHING 9

Basic Process Explaining Lithography – Positive and Negative Resist and their Comparison
– Light Sources – Mask Making Process – Layout Generation using Software Tools –
OpticalLithography - Issues in Optical Lithography – X-ray Lithography – E-beam
Lithography. Wet Chemical Etching- Dry Etching, Plasma Etching System – Etching of Various
Materials Used in VLSI Fabrication.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Outline the basics of semiconductor properties Understand
CO2 Build an idea on microelectronics and its technology Apply
CO3 Apply the semiconductor phenomena relevant to the field of Apply
electronics
CO4 Apply the VLSI technology into IC circuits Analyze
CO5 Analyze the various stages of VLSI physical design involved in Analyze
fabrications.
CO6 Analyze the different methods involved in VLSI fabrication process Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen Santeria,"Microsystems Design", Springer, 2016.
2. NadimMaluf,"An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Engineering, Artech
House, 2004.
3. S. A. Campbell, “The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication”, 2nd Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2001
4. S.M. Sze (Ed), “VLSI Technology”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1988.
REFERENCES:
1. Ai Qun Liu,"Photonic MEMS Devices", CRC press Bocaraton, 2009.
2. Tai Ran Hsu, "MEMS & Micro Systems Design, Manufacture and Nanoscale Engineering", John
Wiley, New Jersy, 2008.
3. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education, 2012.
4. 6. S.K. Ghandhi, “VLSI Fabrication Principles”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley Inc.,
NewYork,Reprint 2004.
Course Designer: D JOHN PRAGASAM, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 3 2 2
CO.5 3 3 2 2
CO.6 3 3 2 2
CAM 2
(Avg) 2.87 3 2

L T P C
21ECV5N05 ASIC & FPGA BASED DESIGN
3 0 0 3
● To explain the design flow of different types of ASIC.
● To familiarize the different types of programming technologies and logic devices.
● To impart knowledge on the architecture of different types of FPGA.
UNIT I Introduction to ASIC AND PLD 9

Types of ASICs - Design flow – CAD tools used in ASIC Design,
ProgrammingTechnologies: Antifuse – static RAM – EPROM
and EEPROM technology,Programmable Logic Devices :
ROMs and EPROMs – PLA –PAL, Gate Arrays – CPLDs and FPGAs
UNIT II ASIC PHYSICAL DESIGN 9

System partition -partitioning - partitioning methods, interconnect delay models and
measurement of delay, floor planning – placement, Routing : global routing - detailed
routing - special routing - circuit extraction - DRC
UNIT III LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING 9

Design systems - Logic Synthesis, Half gate ASIC -Schematic entry - Low level design
language, PLA tools -EDIF- CFI design representation
UNIT IV FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAY 9

FPGAs- Logic blocks, routing architecture, Design flow, technology - mapping for FPGAs, Xilinx
XC4000 - ALTERA„s FLEX 8000/10000, Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Altera MAX 9000 –
Spartan II and Virtex II FPGAs
UNIT V SYSTEM ON CHIP 9

Design Methodologies – Processes and Flows - Embedded software development forSOC –
Techniques for SOC Testing – Configurable SOC – Hardware / Software co-
design Case studies: Digital camera, Bluetooth radio / modem, SDRAM and USB.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the design flow, types and the Understand
programming technologies of an
ASIC.
Design the basics of system on-chip and on chip communication Apply
CO2 architectures.
Apply
CO3
Design a digital circuit with ASIC design flow steps.
CO4 Apply the various partitioning algorithms to different digital Apply
networks.
CO5 Analyze the high performance algorithms available for ASICs Analyze
CO6 Analyze the various routing algorithms for IC fabrication Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.J.S. Smith , Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson, 2003
2. Wayne Wolf, FPGA-Based System Design, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004.
3. Farzad Nekoogar, From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach, Prentice Hall
Prentice Hall modern semiconductor design series, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. K.Chan & S. Mourad, Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Array,
Prentice Hall, 1994.
2. Steve Kilts, Advanced FPGA Design: Architecture, Implementation,
andOptimization, Wiley-IEEE Press,2007.
Course Designer: Dr.I.Sheik Arafat Prof/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2
CO.3 3 2
CO.4 3 2
CO.5 3 2 2 2 2
CO.6 3 2 2 2 2
CAM
2.87 2 2 2 2
(Avg)

Course
1. 21ECV601 Wearable Electronics 3 0 0 3
2. 21BMV703 Human Assist Devices 3 0 0 3
3. 21BMV7N01 Therapeutic Equipment 3 0 0 3
4. 21ECV6N06 Healthcare Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 21ECV605 Biomedical Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
6. 21ECV606 Body Area Networks 3 0 0 3
7. 21ECV607 Embedded Systems in Medical Devices 3 0 0 3
8. 21ECV608 Tele Medicine 3 0 0 3

L T P C
21ECV601 WEARABLE ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the need for development of wearable devices and its implications on various
devices.
 To impart knowledge on various wearable inertial sensors.
 To gain knowledge on various energy harvesting systems.
UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS AND ADVANCEMENTS 9
World of Wearable and Attributes of wearables, Textiles and clothing, Challenges and
Opportunities, Future of Wearables, Making Electronics wearable. Designing wearable
devices.
UNIT 2 FLEXIBLE ELECTROINCS-FROM FOIL TO TEXTILE 9
Introduction, Thin Film Transistors-Materials and Technologies .Review of
semiconductors-Employed in Flexible Electronics, Thin Film Transistors Based on IGZO
.Further Improvements and Implements, Plastic Electronics for smart Textiles
UNIT 3 WEARABLE INERTIAL SENSORS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS 9

Introduction, Wearable Inertial sensors, Obtained parameters from Inertia sensors,
Applications from wearable Motion sensors, Practical considerations from wearable sensors.
UNIT 4 ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Energy Harvesting Systems, Energy Harvesting from Temperature Gradient from
Human body, Energy harvesting from Foot Motion, Wireless Energy Transmission, Energy
harvesting from Light. Energy and Power consumption Issues.
UNIT 5 EMBROIDERED ANTENNAS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9

Introduction-Background of Textile Antenna, Design Rules for embroidered antenna ,
Characterizations of embroidered conductive textiles at radio frequencies,Losses in embroidered
antennas, Applications of embroidered antennas, Influence of the human body on antenna
performance, Body-worn textile antenna for cellular communications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the fundamentals and Advancements in wearables.
Understand
CO2 Apply the knowledge of flexible electronics for smart textiles. Apply
CO3 Design antennas for the various applications of Wearable systems Apply
CO4 Analyze the types of sensors used in real time applications for wearable Analyze
systems
CO5 Analyze the various types of Energy Harvesting methods for real time Analyze
wearables
CO6 Analyze the various applications of wearable devices. Analyze
TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Seamless Healthcare Monitoring”, Toshiyo Tamura and Wenxi Chen, Springer 2018
“Wearable Sensors -Fundamentals, Implementation and Applications”, by Edward
Sazonov and Michael R. Neuman, Elsevier Inc., 2014.
2. “Wearable and Autonomous Biomedical Devices and Systems for Smart
Environment”, by Aimé Lay-Ekuakille and Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay,
Springer 2010
REFERENCES:
1. “Wearable Electronics Sensors - For Safe and Healthy Living”, Subhas Chandra
Mukhopadhyay, Springer 2015G.S.N.Raju, ―Antenna Wave Propagation‖, Pearson Education,
2004.
2.M. Mardonova and Y. Choi, "Review of Wearable Device Technology and Its
Applications to the Mining Industry," Energies, vol. 11, p. 547, 2018
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 2 2 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21BMV702 HUMAN ASSIST DEVICES
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Study various mechanical techniques that will help failing heart.
● Learn the functioning of the unit which does the clearance of urea from
the blood.
● Understand the tests to assess the hearing loss and development of
electronic de compensate for the loss.
UNIT I HEARING AIDS 9
Deafness – Types of Deafness – Hearing Aids, Construction and
Functional Characteristics – Principles, drawbacks in the conventionalH
unit, DSP based hearing aids. - Audiogram, Airconduction, Boneconduction -
Masking techniques, SISI.
UNIT II RESPIRATORY AND CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9
Heart/Lung System – Different types of Oxygenators and Pumps –
Pulsatile and Continuous Type – Monitoring Process – Shunting – Blood
Handling System – Types and Functions of different types of Heart Intra-
Aortic Balloon Pumping (IABP) - Venous Arterial Pumping – Prosthetic
Cardio Valves.
UNIT III ARTIFICIAL KIDNEY 9
Artificial kidney – Dialysis action – Hemodialyser unit - Principles of
Haemodialysis – Membrane dialysis – Dialysate – Types of
Haemodialyzers – Portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters
- Wearable Artificial Kidney – Implanting types.
UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHOTIC DEVICES 9
Hand and Arm replacement – Different types of models: Externally
powered limb prosthesis - Feedback in Orthotic system - Functional
Electrical Stimulation – Sensory assist devices: Vision, dentures – Materials
for Prosthetic and Orthotic Devices – Haptic Devices: Tactile, types and
applications.
UNIT V MEDICAL ROBOTIC 9
Introduction and Overview – History and Clinical Applications -
Components and Configurations of Robots – Case Study: Robotic
arm – Sensors – Associated accessories for Robotic arm – Flexion and
Extension.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the concept and characteristics of Understand
assistive
devices for human.
CO2 Apply the principle and application of cardiac Apply
CO3 Apply the principle of Haemodialysis to know about the Apply
artificial kidney.
CO4 Analyze the devices which are used for respiration and Analyze
hearing of human being.
CO5 Analyze the knowledge of various prosthetic and orthotic Analyze
devices in new and unfamiliar situations.
CO6 Evaluate
Evaluate the functions of robotics in medical applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Levine S.N. (ed), “Advances in Bio-medical engineering and Medical physics”, Vol. I, II, IV,
inter university publications, New York, 1968.
2. Kolff W.J, “Artificial Organs”, John Wiley and sons, New York, 1976.
3. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G, “Therapeutic Medical Devices”, Prentice Hall Inc., New
Jersey, 1982.
REFERENCES:
1. D.S. Sunder, “Rehabilitation Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Jaypee Medical Publication, 2010.
2. James Moore, George Zouridakis, “Biomedical Technology and Devices
Handbook”, CRC Press 2004.
Course Designer:
Ms.A.Jansi Rani [AP/ECE]
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - 3 - 3
CO.2 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
CO.3 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
CO.4 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
CO.5 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
CO.6 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
CAM
2.87 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3
(Avg)

L T P C
21BMV704 THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To gain knowledge on basic concepts of therapeutic methods.
● To explore the therapeutic equipment used in medical applications.
● To comprehend the radiation protection principles and radiation safety
inmedicine.
Unit – 1 CARDIAC ARREST DEVICES 9

Cardiac pacemakers-Need, types and functional characteristics, AC Cardiac
defibrillators, disadvantages, DC defibrillator, types- Instantaneous, Cardioverter.
Unit – 2 DIATHERMY AND MEDICAL STIMULATORS 9
IR and UV lamp and its application. Short wave diathermy, ultrasonic diathermy, Microwave
diathermy, Electrosurgery machine - Current waveforms, Tissue Responses, Electro surgical
current level, Hazards and safety procedures. Electric stimulators- current waveforms-Galvani,
Faradic, exponential surged-IFT and TENS-Lithotripsy-
Therapeutic applications of laser.
Unit – 3 NEONATOLOGY AND EXTRACORPOREAL DEVICES 9

Introduction-Neonatal Intensive Care Unit-Neonatal thermal balance-Therapeutic
devices in obstetrics and gynecology - Functioning of bubble, disc type and membrane type
oxygenators, finger pump, roller pump, monitoring systems.
Unit – 4 RESPIRATORY AIDS 9
Ventilator- Need, Types, Intermittent positive pressure, breathing apparatus operating
sequence, electronic IPPB unit with monitoring for all respiratory parameters, Humidifier,
Nebulizer, Aspirator, Infant incubators.
Unit – 5 RADIATION THERAPY AND RADIATION SAFETY 9
Effects of ionizing radiation, Radiation therapy – Cobalt, Cesium therapy, linear accelerator,
betatron, cyclotron, brachytherapy. Radiation safety-Hazardous Effects of Radiation, Radiation
measuring units, Allowed Levels, Radiation protection in medicine
radiation protection principles, ICRP regulation, Protection metrics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Interpret the basic principles of cardiac and respiratory
CO1 Understand
assist devices.
Apply the knowledge of various procedures to electrically
CO2 Apply
test therapeutic equipment.
Explore the radiation safety principles and radiation
CO3 Apply
protection methods.
Analyze the performance of therapeutic equipment on the
CO4 Apply
given condition.
Design and analyze basic therapeutic equipment for
CO5 Analyze
medical applications using simulation tool
Evaluate the characteristics of different therapeutic
CO6 Evaluate
methods.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design”, Fifth
edition, John Wiley & Sons- Inc, 2020.
2. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Fifth edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J. Weibell, Erich. A. Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements”, Second edition, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Albert M. Cook and Webster J. G, “Therapeutic Medical Devices”, PrenticeHall Inc.,
New Jersey, 1982.
3. Gopal B. Saha, “Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine‖”, Fourth edition,
Springer, 2016.
4. Joseph. J. Carr and John. M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Fourth edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New York, 2002.
COURSE DESIGNER: Ms.K. Shanmugapriya [AP/ECE]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO PO 1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO5 2 3 - - - 3 - - - - - - 3 3
CO6 2 2 - - - 3 - - - - - - 3 3
CA M 2.3 2.2 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 2.3 2.3

21ECV6N06 HEALTHCARE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To Identify various areas of Healthcare system.
• To Identify various activities of health care departments like out/inpatient
treatment Equipments.
• To introduce students with fundamentals instrumentation of the equipments used
in health care system
UNIT I Introduction to Healthcare System 9
Health organization of the country, Indian hospitals- challenges, and strategies, modern
techniques of hospital management. Physiological Transducers, Related Anatomy and Physiology.
UNIT II Engineering Services on Healthcare: 9

Biomedical engineer‟s role in Healthcare, Maintenance department, MRO, Electrical safety,
Centralized gas supply system, Air conditioning system, Hospital waste management
system, Fire safety and threat Alarm system.
UNIT III Bioelectric signals and Bioelectric amplifiers in healthcare: 9
Origin of bioelectric signals, Electrodes, Electrode-tissue interface, Galvanic Skin
Response, BSR, Motion artifacts, Instrumentation amplifiers, Special features of bioelectric
amplifiers, Carrier amplifiers, Chopper amplifiers, Phase sensitive detector.
UNIT IV Mechanical & lab Equipments in healthcare system : 9
BP Apparatus, Suction Machine and Microscope. Recording and Monitoring Equipment: ECG
and EEG Machines, Pulse Oximeter, Cardiac Monitor and Audiometer. Colorimeter,
Spectrophotometer, Semi-Auto Analyzer, Centrifuge and Oven. Imaging Systems: X-Ray and
Ultrasound Machines.
UNIT V PC based medical equipments in healthcare system : 9
Introduction to - System configuration and BIOS, Identification & Troubleshooting of PC components
viz-Motherboard, HDD, FDD, CD ROM, Monitor, Printers, Modems, Ports etc. Installation and
operation of - Windows Operating System, Antivirus Software,
Internetworking.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the fundamental instrumentation of the Understand
equipments used in health care systems
Applying the Engineering and Technical concepts to Observe and Apply
CO2 Identify the Biomedical signals.
Describe and characterize the sources of biomedical Apply
CO3 signals and needs of using biomedical instruments & their
limitations.
Study & Identify the different bio potential signals of various parts of Analyze
CO4 Human body using sensors and electrodes.
CO5 Analyze the Bio-potential signals observed from sensors and Analyze
Identify the Symptoms of diseases at initial stage.
Analyze the symptoms of disease at different stages from initial Analyze
CO6 condition and take preventive actions to protect life
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans Pfeiff, Vera Dammann (Ed.), Hospital Engineering in Developing Countries, Z report
Eschbom, 1986.
2. R. S. Khandpur “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGrawHill, 2003.
3. J.J.Carr & J.M.Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology” Pearson
Education, Asia, 2010
REFERENCES:
1.R.C. Goyal, Handbook of Hospital Personal Management, Prentice Hall of India, 1993
2.Joseph Bronzino, “Biomedical Engineering and Instrumentation”, PWS Engg . ,
Boston.
3.J.Webster, “Bioinstrumentation”, Wiley & Sons.
4.R.Anandanatarajan, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, PHI Learning, 2009.
5.John G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, 3rd edition, John Wiley
& Sons, New York, 1998.
Course Designer:T.Venkatesh kanna / ASP / ECE
Course Articulation Matrix

PO POS POS
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO11
12 1 2
CO1 2 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO6 3 - 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CAM 2.83 2.8 2.5 2 2 2 2

L T P C
BIOMEDICAL MEASUREMENTS AND
21ECV605 3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION
OBJECTIVES:
 To Introduce Fundamentals of Biomedical Engineering and communication mechanics in
abiomedical system
• To study measurement of certain important electrical and non-electrical parameters
• To understand the basic principles in imaging techniques ,life assisting and therapeutic
devices
Unit – 1 INTRODUCTION 9
Cell and its structure – Resting and Action Potential – Nervous system and its fundamentals- Basic
components of a biomedical system- Cardiovascular systems- Respiratory systems - Kidney and
blood flow - Biomechanics of bone - Biomechanics of soft tissues -Physiological signals and
transducers - Transducers – selection criteria – Piezo electric, ultrasonic transducers -
Temperature measurements - Fibre optic temperature sensors
Unit – 2 NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT AND 9
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES
Measurement of blood pressure - Cardiac output - Heart rate - Heart sound - Pulmonary function
measurements – spirometer – Photo Plethysmography, Body Plethysmography
–Blood Gas analysers, pH of blood –measurement of blood pCO2, pO2, finger-tip oxymeter
- ESR, GSR measurements.
Unit – 3 ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS ACQUISITION AND 9
ANALYSIS
Electrodes – Limb electrodes –floating electrodes – pregelled disposability electrodes - Micro,
needle and surface electrodes – Amplifiers, Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper
amplifiers – Isolation amplifier - ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – Lead systems and recording
methods – Typical waveforms - Electrical safety in medical environment.
Unit – 4 IMAGING MODALITIES AND ANALYSIS 9

Radio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques – Computer tomography – MRI –
Ultrasonography – Endoscopy – Thermography –Different types of biotelemetry systems
- Retinal Imaging - Imaging application in Biometric systems-PET
Unit – 5 CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
LIFE ASSISTING, THERAPEUTIC AND ROBOTIC DEVICES 9
Pacemakers – Defibrillators – Ventilators – Nerve and muscle stimulators – Diathermy – Heart –
Lung machine P P
PO– Audio
PO meters
PO PO – Dialysers
PO PO – Lithotripsy
PO PO - ICCU
PO patient
PO monitoring system
PS -PS
Nano
CO
Robots - Robotic O O
1 surgery
2 –Orthopedic
3 4 5prostheses
6 7fixation.
8 9 10 O1 O2
11 12
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
CO1 2 2 2 2
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1CO2 Illustrate
3 2 the philosophy of biomedical measuring instruments. Understand
2
Apply the working principle of the medical assistance/techniques, Apply
robotic and therapeutic equipment in various application
CO2 3 2 2
CO3
Apply electronic concepts for the design of various biomedical
instrumentation.
CO3 Apply
CO4 3Analyze2 the performance
2 of traditional and modern 2
CO4 Analyze
medical instrumentation using case studies
Analyze different parameters applicable in the
CO5
CO5 3 3 2 2 2
Development of instrumentation for healthcare
Analyze
applications.
CO6
CO6 3Analyze2 various biomedical Signals
2 UsingMATLAB
2 Analyze
2
simulation software(Modern tool usage)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Leslie
CAMCromwell,
3 2.2 2
Biomedical Instrumentation2 and2measurement,
2 2nd edition, 2
Prentice hall of India, New Delhi,2015
2. Khandpur R.S, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, 3rd edition,Tata
L T P C
21ECV606 BODY AREA NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
⮚ To know the hardware requirement of BAN
⮚ To understand the communication and security aspects in the BAN
⮚ To know the applications of BAN in the field of medicine
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9
Definition, BAN and Healthcare, Technical Challenges- Sensor design, biocompatibility, Energy
Supply, optimal node placement, number of nodes, System security and reliability, BAN
Architecture – Introduction.
UNIT II HARDWARE FOR BAN 9
Processor-Low Power MCUs, Mobile Computing MCUs ,Integrated processor with radio
Transceiver, Memory, Antenna-PCB antenna, Wire antenna, Ceramic antenna, External
antenna, Sensor Interface, Power sources- Batteries and fuel cells for sensor nodes.
UNIT III WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND NETWORK 9
RF communication in Body, Antenna design and testing, Propagation, Base Station-
Network topology-Stand –Alone BAN, Wireless personal Area Network Technologies-IEEE
802.15.1,IEEE P802.15.13, IEEE 802.15.14, Zigbee.
UNIT IV COEXISTENCE ISSUES WITH BAN 9
Interferences – Intrinsic - Extrinsic, Effect on transmission, Counter measures- on physical layer
and data link layer, Regulatory issues-Medical Device regulation in USA and Asia, Security and
Self-protection-Bacterial attacks, Virus infection, Secured protocols, Self-
protection.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF BAN 9
Monitoring patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly patients, Cardiac
arrhythmias monitoring, Multi patient monitoring systems, Multichannel Neural recording, Gait
analysis, Sports Medicine, Electronic pill.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concepts of wireless sensor Networks
CO1 Understand
and Medical device regulations.
Comprehend technical information and challenges in body
CO2 Apply
area networks.
Illustrate the need for medical device regulations followed in
CO3 Apply
various regions.
Apply wireless sensor Network concept to implement
CO4 Healthcare Applications. Apply
Analyze the efficiency of communication and the security
CO5 parameters Analyze
Design a BAN for appropriate application in medicine.
CO6 Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Annalisa Bonfiglio, Danilo De Rossi, "Wearable Monitoring Systems", Springer, 2011.
2. Sandeep K.S. Gupta,Tridib Mukherjee, Krishna Kumar Venkata Subramanian, “Body Area,
Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability‟‟, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Zhang, Yuan-Ting, “Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems‟‟, Springer, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang(Ed.), “Body Sensor Networks‟‟, Springer, 2006.
3. Mehmet R. Yuce, Jamil Y.Khan, “Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation, and Applications”, Pan Stanford Publishing Pte. Ltd., Singapore, 2012.
Course Designer: Mr. P.SELVAPRASANTH AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 2 3
CO.6 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CAM
2 2
(Av . . 2.5 2.5 2 2 2
g) 5 5
L T P C
21ECV607
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN MEDICAL DEVICES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To know the fundamental concepts of medical devices in embedded systems
● To apply the microcontroller concept for designing medical devices
● To understand the biosensors and embedded devices for clinical practices
● To expose the student to various healthcare applications
UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF SENSORS AND ELECTRODES 9
Generalized medical instrumentation systems and classification- Bio potential amplifiers – Filters-Bio
Sensors – Displacement Measurement –Temperature Measurement – Optical Measurement- Bio
potential electrodes – Polarizable and Nonpolarizable Electrodes, Body-
Surface Recording Electrodes, Internal Electrodes, Electrode Arrays, Microelectrodes, Design
criteria and development process of commercial medical devices
UNIT II MICROCONTROLLERS IN MEDICAL DEVICES 8
Basics of microcontroller – Embedded Medical System- Selection of a Microcontroller – IoT- Based
Medical Devices- ECG,EEG and EMG-Based Embedded Medical System
UNIT III EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN HEALTH CARE MONITORING 9
Measurement of Blood Pressure and Sound – Direct Measurements, Measurement of System
Response, Systems for Measuring Venous Pressure, Indirect Measurements of Blood Pressure,
Heart Sounds, Phonocardiography- Measurement of Flow and Volume of Blood- Measurements of
the Respiratory System – Modeling the Respiratory System –
Measurement of Pressure – Measurement of Gas Flow – Lung Volume – Respiratory
Plethysmography
UNIT IV EMBEDDED DEVICES FOR CLINICAL LABORATORY 10
Chemical biosensors – Electrochemical Sensors, Chemical Fibrosensors, Ion-Sensitive Field-Effect
Transistor (ISFET), Immunologically Sensitive Field-Effect Transistor (IMFET), Noninvasive Blood-
Gas Monitoring, Blood-Glucose Sensors, Electronic Noses and Lab-on- a-chip- Clinical Laboratory
Instrumentation – Spectrophotometry, Automated Chemical Analyzers, Chromatology,
Electrophoresis, Hematology, Ethical issues related to clinical research
UNIT V WIRELESS SENSING IN HEALTHCARE 9

Introduction to m-health – Smart m-Health Sensing, m-Health Computing m-
Health2.0, Social Networks, Health Apps, Cloud and Big Health Data- Open source
software & hardware for designing embedded based medical devices – The Future of m- Health
–case study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concepts of embedded systems in
CO1 Understand
medical devices.
CO2 Apply the basic knowledge of sensors and m-health to design Apply
various healthcare devices.
Apply the fundamental principles of embedded systems to
CO3 Apply
implement healthcare devices for a given problem.
Apply the basic mathematical knowledge to provide a solution for
CO4 Apply
the given specification.
Analyze the use of various embedded systems for the given
CO5 Analyze
problem.
Develop simple health care monitoring systems for different
CO6 applications by considering all the ethical factors. Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John G. Webster, Amit J. Nimunkar , “ Medical Instrumentation - Application and
Design”, Fifth Edition, JohnWiley and Sons, 2020
2. Roberts. H. Istepanian and Bryan Woodward, “m-Health Fundamentals and
Applications”, Wiley, 2017
3. Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay and Aime Lay-Ekuakille, “Advances in
BiomedicalSensing, Measurements, Instrumentation and Systems”, Springer, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Niezen G, Eslambolchilar P, Thimbleby H, “Open-source hardware for medical devices”, BMJ

Innovations 2016.
2. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, Third Edition,
CRCPress,Taylor & Francis Group, 2006
Course Designer: Mrs.T.Ruba, AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2 2
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 2 2
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CAM
2.7 2.2 2.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.3
(Avg)
L T P C
21ECV608 TELE MEDICINE
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Explain basic parts of Teleradiology systems like Image Acquisition System, Display
System, Communication Network and Interpretation.
● Impart the need of Various telemedical technology in designing the Telemedicine
system
● Describe the medical image information processing and ethical aspects of
Telemedicine
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TELEMEDICINE 9
History and Evolution of telemedicine, Functional diagram of telemedicine system, Telemedicine,
Tele health, Tele care, Organs of telemedicine, Global and Indian scenario, Scope, Benefits and
limitations of Telemedicine.
UNIT II TELEMEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 9

Principles of Multimedia - Text, Audio, Video, data, Data communications networks and
Services.Wireless communication; Wireless Networks: Bluetooth, Infrared, WLAN and Wi-Fi, Zig-
Bee and Cellular networks – RFID in Telemedicine; Wireless Technology in Patient monitoring;
General health assessments.
UNIT III MEDICAL INFORMATION PROCESSING 9

Collecting Data from Patients; Bio-signal Transmission and Processing; Information Security
overview- Risks and Security management – Cryptography; Digital Signature, Safeguarding
Patient Medical History; Anonymous Data collection and Processing; Biometric Security and
Identification.
UNIT IV TELEMEDICINE APPLICATIONS 9

Telecare; Telecare for Senior Citizens, Telemedicine in Physiotherapy; Healthcare access for
rural areas; Healthcare Technology and the Environment, Home care for the Elderly, Smart home
Assistive Technologies.
UNIT V ETHICAL AND LEGAL ASPECTS OF TELEMEDICINE 9
Confidentiality and Law, patient rights and consent, access to medical Records, Consent
treatment, jurisdictional Issues, Intellectual property rights.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the fundamental concept, ethical and legal Aspects Understand
of telemedical system.
Apply the concept of communication system for the design of
CO2 telehealth applications Apply
CO3 Apply the concept of multimedia technologies in the Apply

healthcare applications
CO4 Analyze the various medical information processing Analyze

techniques for safeguarding medical data
CO5 Describe the role of Information technology in alternative Apply

medicines with case studies
Apply telemedicine technologies and practices in a variety of Apply
CO6 health care Environments
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Norris, A.C. “Essentials of Telemedicine and Tele care”, Wiley, 2002
2. Bernard Fong, A.C.M Fong and C.K.Li, “Telemedicine Technologies”, John Wiley,
2011.
3. Wootton, R., Craig, J, Patterson, “Introduction to Telemedicine” Royal Society of
Medicine Press Ltd. , (2nd ed.), 2006
REFERENCES:
1. H.K. Huang, “PACS and imaging informatics – Basic Principles &
application”,Wiley Blackwell
2. Carroll, P.W., Yasnoff, W.A., Ward, E., Ripp, L.H., Martin, E.L. (Eds), “Public
HealthInformatics and Information Systems”, Springer, 2003.
3. Ferrer-Roca, O., Sosa - Iudicissa, M. (Eds.), Handbook of Telemedicine. IOS
Press(Studies in Health Technology and Informatics, Volume 54, 2002.
4. Latifi, R. “Current Principles and Practices of Telemedicine and e-Health”. Washington
DC: IOHS , 2008. 5. Mohan Bansal, “Medical Informatics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004
Course Designer: Taj Orthopedic Research Centre (TORC), Taj Hospital Madurai.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2 2 2 2
CO.2 3 2 2 3
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2
CO.5 2 3 2 2 2
CO.6 2 2 2 2 2
CAM
2.5 2.2 2 2 2 2 2
(Avg)
Course
Other Electives
1. 21UEC901 Linear Control Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC902 Principles of Robotics 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC903 Principles of Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC904 Multimedia Compression and Communication 3 0 0 3
5. 21UEC905 ARM System Development 3 0 0 3
6. 21UEC906 AR & VR 3 0 0 3
L T P C
21UEC901 LINEAR CONTROL ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the concept of open loop and closed loop (feedback) systems
● To provide knowledge of time domain and frequency domain analysis of control
systems.
● To present the compensation technique that can be used to stabilize control
systems
Unit – 1 CONTROL SYSTEMS MODELING 9

Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure, Open loop and Closed Loop Systems -Feed
forward and Feedback control theory, Mechanical and Electrical Transfer Function Models, Block
diagram Models, Signal flow graphs models.
Unit – 2 TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Transient response-Steady state response, Measures of performance of thee standard first order and
second order system, Steady error constant and system- type number, PID control- Analytical design
for PD, PI,PID control systems
Unit – 3 FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9

Closed loop frequency response, Performance specification in frequency domain, Frequency
response of standard second order system , Bode Plot , Polar Plot , Nyquist plots, Design of
compensators using Bode plots
Unit – 4 STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability, Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability, Routh stability criterion, Root
locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus, Nyquist stability criterion.
Unit – 5 CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING STATE VARIABLE 9

METHODS
State variable representation, Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions, Conversion of
transfer functions to state variable models, Solution of state equations, Concepts of Controllability and
Observability, Stability of linear systems
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe mathematical models of feedback control systems in terms
CO1 of differential equations, transfer functions and state-space Understand
representation.
CO2 Apply Laplace transform to illustrate different specifications of the control Apply
system using transfer function model.
CO3 Analyze the stability and system performance in time , frequency and Analyze
state space domain.
Analyze the needs of different types of controllers and compensators to Analyze

CO4 ascertain the required dynamic response from the system.
CO5 Assess the techniques for improving the system Evaluate
performance in time and frequency domain.
Design mechanical and electrical control systems using Matlab

CO6 Apply
/Simulink with control system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Gopal, ―Control System – Principles and Design‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition, 2012.
2. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, ―Control System Engineering‖, New Age
International Publishers, 5th Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Norman S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, 6th edition, Wiley, 2011.
2. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, 12th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2011.
3. Benjamin.C.Kuo, ‖ Automatic control systems‖, Prentice Hall ofIndia,6thEdition
,2013
Course Designer : Mr.A.Nagaraj AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21UEC902 PRINCIPLES OF ROBOTICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To Introduce basic concepts in robotics.
● To make students aware of technologies used in robotics.
● To impart the knowledge of various programming techniques for
robotics design.
Unit – 1 INTRODUCTION 9
Brief history-Types of Robot–Technology-Robot classifications and specifications-Design and
Control issues- Various manipulators – Sensors - work cell - Programming languages.
Unit – 2 ROBOT MOTION ANALYSIS AND CONTROL 9

Mathematical representation of Robots - Position and orientation – Homogeneous
transformation- Various joints- Representation using the Denavit Hattenberg parameters - Degrees
of freedom-Direct kinematics-Inverse kinematics- SCARA robots- Solvability – Solution methods-
Closed form solution.
Unit – 3 MANIPULATOR DIFFERENTIAL MOTION AND STATICS 9

Linear and angular velocities-Manipulator Jacobian-Prismatic and rotary joints–Inverse - Wrist and
arm singularity - Static analysis - Force and moment Balance. Manipulator control problem-Linear
control schemes-PID control scheme-Force control of robotic manipulator.
Unit – 4 PATH PLANNING 9

Definition-Joint space technique-Use of p-degree polynomial-Cubic polynomial-Cartesian space
technique - Parametric descriptions - Straight line and circular paths - Position and orientation
planning.
Unit – 5 ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9

Methods of Robot programming; lead through programming methods; a robot program as a path
in space; motion interpolation; weight, signal and delay commands; Branching, capabilities and
limitations of lead through methods.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basic concept of robotics. Understand
CO2 Apply the various concepts of motion control and statics to design a Apply
robotics parts
CO3 Apply the knowledge of the dynamics in robotics control Apply
CO4 Analyze the various path planning techniques in robotics Analyze
CO5 Apply the knowledge of basic programming for various controls Apply
on robots.
CO6 Evaluate the manipulator differential motion and various path Evaluate
planning techniques in robotics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.K. Mittal and I.J. Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,4th
Reprint, 2005.
2.MikellP.Groover, Michellwein,Roger N. Nagal and Nicholas G.Ordey, "Industrial
Robotics, technology, Programming and applications‖ McGraw Hill.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashitava Ghoshal, Robotics-Fundamental Concepts and Analysis‘, Oxford University
Press, Sixth impression, 2010.
2. K. K.AppuKuttan, Robotics, I K International, 2007.
3. V.Damel Hunt, ―Smart Robots‖, Chappan and Hall
4. S.Ghoshal, ―Embedded Systems & Robotics‖ – Projects using the 8051

Microcontroller‖, Cengage Learning, 2009.
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21UEC903 PRINCIPLES OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the fundamental concepts in artificial intelligence.

● To impart the make the students to apply the artificial intelligence techniques in
application which involve reasoning and learning.
● To give an idea about the basics of designing intelligent agents that can solve
general purpose problems.
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION & PROBLEM SOLVING 9
The foundation of Artificial Intelligence, The History of Artificial Intelligence, The state of Art
Intelligence Agents, Structure of Agents & Problem Solving Agent Searching for solution
Uninformed search strategies ,Heuristics– informed search strategies
UNIT 2 LOGICAL REASONING 9
Logical agents, Knowledge Based Agent, The Wumpus World, Propositional Theorem Proving,
Effective Propositional Model ,checking, Agent Based on Propositional Logic
UNIT 3 PLANNING 9
Algorithm for Planning With State-Space Search, Planning Graphs ,Other classical Planning
Approaches, Planning and Acting In The Real World -Hierarchical Planning.
UNIT 4 UNCERTAIN KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING 9
Quantifying Uncertainty, Basic probability Notation, Probabilistic Reasoning- Bayesian Networks,

Inferences In Bayesian Networks, Dynamic Bayesian Networks
UNIT 5 DESIGN THINKING IN BUSINESS PROCESSES 9
Forms of Learning, Learning From Observation-Supervised Learning, Decision Trees

,Statistical Learning Methods, Reinforcement Learning-Passive Reinforcement Learning
,Active Reinforcement Learning
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic concepts of Artificial Intelligence.

CO1 Understand
CO2 Apply the basic principles of AI in solutions that require problem
Apply
solving and learning.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of Bayesian networks under uncertain Apply
environment.
CO4 Apply learning algorithms to derive facts from the given data set. Apply
CO5 Analyze the various reinforcement Learning in intelligence systems Apply

CO6 Analyze the various planning methods in Analyze
intelligence systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. 1.D. Poole and A. Mackworth. Artificial Intelligence:Foundations of Computational

Agents,Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. 2.Stuart J.Russell and Peter Norvig,‘Artificial Intelligence A Modern
Approach,Thirdedition,Pearson Education ,2010
REFERENCES:
1. David Poole, Alan Mackworth, Randy Goebel, ‖Computational Intelligence : a logical

approach‖, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. J. Nilsson, ―Artificial Intelligence: A new Synthesis‖, Elsevier Publishers, 1998.
3. R. Brachman, H. Levesque. Knowledge Representation and Reasoning,
MorganKaufmann, 2004.
Course Designer : Mrs.N.Kani Amudham AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION AND L T P C
21UEC904
COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize the basic concepts of multimedia components.
 To be well known to the compression techniques.
 To enrich the knowledge of VoIP technology.
Unit – 1 MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS 9
Introduction: Multimedia Multimedia information, Multimedia networks ,Multimedia
applications, Application ,Text, sound, images, graphics, animation, Video, hardware
Unit – 2 AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9
Audio compression ,DPCM ,Adaptive PCM, Adaptive predictive coding, linear Predictive coding
code excited LPC, Perpetual coding Video compression, principles- H.261,H.263- MPEG 1, 2, 4
Unit – 3 TEXT AND IMAGE COMPRESSION 9

Compression Principles, Source Encoders And Destination Encoders, Lossless And Lossy
Compression, Entropy Encoding –Source Encoding, Text Compression,Static Huffman Coding
Dynamic Coding, Arithmetic Coding, LempelZiv-Welsh Compression- Image Compression
Unit – 4 VOIPTECHNOLOGY 9
VoIP Components, Voice Quality, Measuring Voice Quality, Testing VoIP, Case Studies, VoIP
Applications VoIP: Present and Future
Unit – 5 MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING 9

Multimedia networking,Applications,Streamed stored and audio-making the best Effort service,
Voice-over IP, Protocols for real time interactive Applications-distributing multimedia-beyond
best effort service,Scheduling Mechanisms and policing Mechanisms-integrated services,
Differentiated Services-RSVP, Recent application in multimedia
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the compression techniques for different applications Understand
Apply various predictive coding techniques for audio and video

CO2 Apply
applications
Apply the multimedia compression techniques for wireless
CO3 Analyze
communication protocols
Analyze the performance metrics of various compression
CO4 Analyze
techniques
Analyze the QOS mechanisms for real-time online multimedia
CO5 Evaluate
systems
Simulate Image Compression techniques for different images using
CO6 Apply
simulation tools.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fred Halsall ―Multimedia communication - Applications, Networks, Protocols and
Standards‖, Pearson Education, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Tay Vaughan, ―Multimedia: Making it work‖, 7 th Edition, TMH 2008
2. Kurose and W.Ross ―Computer Networking ―a Top Down Approach‖, Pearson
Education 2005
3. Mr. Angus Ma―Voice over IP‖, Spirent Communications, 2001.
4. Dr. TamalChakraborty ―VoIP technology: applications and challenges‖2019.
5. KR. Rao,Z S Bojkovic, D A Milovanovic, ―Multimedia Communication Systems:
Techniques, Standards, and Networks‖, Pearson Education 2007.
6. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, ―Multimedia Computing, Communications and
Applications‖, Pearson Education.
Course Designer : Mrs.G.Ramupriya AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21UEC905 ARM SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce ARM fundamentals.
 To impart knowledge on ARM language and organization.
 To introduce the hardware architecture support and instruction set.
Unit – 1 ARM EMBEDDED SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS 9

The RISC and ARM Design Philosophy, Embedded system Hardware, Embedded system
Software, ARM processor Fundamentals, Current Program status Registers, Pipeline,
Exceptions, Interrupts and Vector Table, ARM processor families, Instruction Set
Unit – 2 ARM CORTEX M3 ARCHITECTURE 9

Architecture, Registers, operating Modes, Exception and interrupts, vector table, Stack memory
operations, Instruction set, Bus Interfaces, Interrupt Behavior
Unit – 3 MEMORY SYSTEMS 9

Memory hierarchy and cache memory, Cache Architecture, ARM MMU, Page Tables,
Translation Look aside buffer, Cache and write Buffer, Coprocessor 15 and MMU configuration
Unit – 4 ARM PROGRAMMING 9

Efficient C programming, ARM assembly code writing, FIIR and IIR filter design
Unit – 5 SYSTEM DEBUGGING 9
Debugging feature, Core sight overview, Debug modes and events, Breakpoints in the Cortex
M3, Accessing Registers, Debugging Components
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the function of ARM and Cortex M3 systems Understand

Apply the various data types of ARM and Cortex M3 systems Apply
CO2
to develop various codes.
Analyze the different types of programming mode for Analyze

CO3 ARM and Cortex M3 systems
Validate the ARM and Cortex M3 systems using its Evaluate
CO4
various functions.
Design the real time system using ARM and Cortex Create
CO5
M3 systems
Design the project Motor Speed Controlling through Voice Apply
Co6 using LabVIEW
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ARM System Developer‗s Guide, Designing and Optimizing system software,
Elsevier,2008,Andrew N Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright.
2. The Definitive Guide to the ARM® Cortex-M3, Second Edition, Joseph Yiu.
REFERENCES:
1. ARM system on chip architecture, Steve Furber, Addision Wesley,2000
2. Assembly language Programming ARM Cortex-M3, Vincent Mahout, Wiley,2013
Course Designer : Mrs.P.Deepa AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3
CO.3 3 3
CO.4 3 3
CO.5 3 2 2 3
CO.6 3 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.7 2 2 2.8

L T P C
21UEC906 AR &VR
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To Learn the fundamental Computer Vision, Computer Graphics and Human-Computer
interaction
● To Impart Geometric Modeling Techniques Review the Virtual Environment
● To make use of various types of Hardware and Software in Virtual Reality systems
to varieties of Applications
UNIT I Introduction to Virtual Reality (VR) 9
Virtual Reality and Virtual Environment, Computer graphics, Real time computer graphics, Flight
Simulation, Virtual environment requirement, benefits of virtual reality, Historical development of VR,
Scientific Landmark
UNIT II Computer Graphics and Geometric Modelling 9
The Virtual world space, positioning the virtual observer, the perspective projection, human vision, stereo
perspective projection, Color theory, Conversion From 2D to 3D, 3D space curves, 3D boundary
representation, Simple 3D modelling, 3D clipping, Illumination models, Reflection models, Shading
algorithms, Geometrical Transformations: Introduction, Frames of reference,Modelling transformations,
Instances, Picking, Flying, Scaling the VE, Collision detection
UNIT III Virtual Environment 9
Input/Output Devices: Input (Tracker, Sensor, Digital Gloves, Movement Capture, Video based Input, 3D
Menus & 3D Scanner, etc.), Output (Visual/Auditory/Haptic Devices) Generic VR system: Introduction,
Virtual environment, Computer environment, VR technology, Model of interaction, VR Systems, Animating
the Virtual Environment: Introduction, The dynamics of numbers, Linear and Nonlinear interpolation, the
animation of objects, linear and non-linear translation, shape & object in between, free from deformation,
particle system Physical Simulation: Introduction, Objects falling in a gravitational field, Rotating wheels,
Elastic collisions, projectiles, simple pendulum, springs, Flight dynamics of an aircraft
UNIT IV Augmented Reality (AR) 9
Taxonomy, Technology and Features of Augmented Reality, AR Vs VR, Challenges with AR, AR systems
and functionality, Augmented Reality Methods, Visualization Techniques for Augmented Reality, enhancing
interactivity in AR Environments, Evaluating AR systems
UNIT V Development Tools and Frameworks 9
Human factors: Introduction, the eye, the ear, the somatic senses Hardware: Introduction, sensor
hardware, Head-coupled displays, Acoustic hardware,Integrated VR systems Software: Introduction,
Modelling virtual world, Physical simulation, VR toolkits, Introduction to VRML
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the fundamental concepts related to VR/AR Understand
CO2 Apply the Knowledge of Computer vision to design Geometric Apply

Modeling Techniques
CO3 Apply the Knowledge of Human Computer Interaction to Apply

understand the Basic Virtual Environment
CO4 Apply various types of Hardware and Software in Virtual Reality Apply
systems
CO5 Analyze the various VR/AR Technologies Analyze
CO6 Design and formulate Virtual/Augmented Reality Applications Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Coiffet, P., Burdea, G. C., (2003), “Virtual Reality Technology,” Wiley-IEEE Press,
ISBN: 9780471360896
2. Schmalstieg, D., Höllerer, T., (2016), “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice,”
Pearson, ISBN: 9789332578494
3. Norman, K., Kirakowski, J., (2018), “ Wiley Handbook of Human Computer
Interaction,” Wiley-Blackwell, ISBN: 9781118976135.
REFERENCES:
1. Craig, A. B., (2013), “Understanding Augmented Reality, Concepts and
Applications,” Morgan Kaufmann, ISBN: 9780240824086
2. Craig, A. B., Sherman, W. R., Will, J. D., (2009), “Developing Virtual Reality
Applications, Foundations of Effective Design,” Morgan Kaufmann, ISBN:
9780123749437
3. John Vince, J., (2002), “Virtual Reality Systems, “ Pearson, ISBN: 9788131708446 4.
Anand, R., “Augmented and Virtual Reality,” Khanna Publishing House
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3
CO6 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3
CAM
(Avg) 2.6 2.6 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3

21UEC907 Cyber security systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge in basic networking and web technology
● To train about of information security & fundamentals of cryptography
● To prepare the students to learn about security standards and regulations
UNIT I NETWORKING AND WEB TECHNOLOGY 8
Network Components - Network Basics - Network Communication -Web Technologies TCP IP -

Web Services.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CYBERSECURITY 9
Recent Cyber Attacks - Cyber Security Concepts - Layers of Cyber Security -Introduction to
Application Security - Secure Coding OWASP Top 10 - Coding Practices Secure Design –
Closure.
UNIT III INFORMATION SECURITY & CRYPTOGRAPHY 10
Information security- Data Security - Network security - Application Security – Closure

Cryptography - Shared Key Cryptography – Illustration - Shared Key Cryptography - Public Key
Cryptography – Illustration - Public Key Cryptography – Hashing -Digital Signature –
Illustration - Digital Signature - Applications of cryptography.
UNIT IV PRIVACY IN CYBER SPACE 9
Privacy Concepts -Principles and Policies - Privacy on the Web - Email Security - Privacy Impacts
of Emerging Technologies - Data Mining and Big Data.
UNIT V SECURITY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS 9
PCIDSS–ISMS-FIPS and NIST Special Publications–FISMA–GDPR–HIPAA–SOX

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the basic concepts of network components, OSI and
CO1 TCP/IP architecture with network security standards. Understand
Apply the concept of Security algorithm in networks
CO2 standards Apply
CO3 Apply the knowledge of cryptography in web and security
Apply
management
Apply the working principles of access based control systems,
Apply
CO4 security threats ,wireless security threats analysis
Analyze the security incident response tools to quickly detect the
Analyze
CO5 cyber -attacks in the network (Modern tool usage)
Analyze the importance of Security Standards with different
Analyze
CO6 algorithm for security issues.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Patrick Ciccarelli, Christina Faulkner, Jerry Fitzgerald, Alan Dennis, David, Groth,
AndToby Skandier,“NETWORKING BASICS”, Second edition JohnWiley & Sons, Inc,
Newyork.2012
2. Simon Hakim, Philadelphia, PA, USA, Erwin A. Blackstone, Philadelphia, PA, USA, “Cyber-
Physical Security”, ISBN 978-3-319-32822-5 ISBN 978-3-319-32824-9 (eBook) DOI10.1007/978-
3-319-32824-9, New Delhi.2017
REFERENCES:
1. Walter Goral ski, “The illustrated Network How TCP/IP Works in a Modern Network”
Second Edition, Copyright 2017, 2009 Elsevier Inc.
2. Ilya Grigorik, “High-Performance Browser Networking”. O’Reilly Media, 2013.
3. Martti Lehto, Pekka Neittaanmäki, “Cyber Security: Analytics, Technology and
Automation”Intelligent Systems, Control and Automation: Science and Engineering, 2015.
4. Atul kahate, “Cryptography and Network security” Tata Mc Graw –Hill Publishing
companyltd, New Delhi 2015.
5. George K.Kostopoulous, Cyber Space and Cyber Security, CRC Press, 2016.
Course Designer: Mrs.G.Ramu Priya AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 2 2
CO.3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 2
CO.6 3 2 2
CAM
3 2.2 2 2
(Avg)
OPEN ELECTIVE COURSE OFFERED FOR OTHER PROGRAMMES
Course
S. No. Code Course Title L T P C
1. 21UEC971 Design thinking for Innovations 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC972 IoT Concepts and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. 21UEC973 Sensors 3 0 0 3
4. 21UEC974 Fundamentals of VLSI Design 3 0 0 3
5. 21UEC975 Wearable Devices 3 0 0 3
6. 21UEC976 Principles of Communication systems 3 0 0 3
7. 21UEC977 Automotive Electronics 3 0 0 3

L T P C
21UEC971 DESIGN THINKING FOR INNOVATIONS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To explain the process of Design Ideas.
● To familiarize the students about the prototype and testing.
● To develop design ideas in Business.
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN THINKING 9
An insight into Design, origin of Design thinking, Design thinking Vs Engineering thinking,
importance of Design thinking, Design Vs Design thinking, understanding Design thinking and
its process models, application of Design thinking
UNIT 2 EMPATHIZE IN DESIGN THINKING 9

Human-Centred Design (HCD) process - Empathize, Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test and
Iterate. Role of Empathy in design thinking, methods and tools of empathy, understanding
empathy tools. Explore define phase state users’ needs and problems using empathy methods
UNIT 3 IDEATION, PROTOTYPING AND TESTING 9
Ideation methods, brain storming, advantages of brain storming, methods and tools
of ideations, prototyping and methods of prototyping, user testing methods, Advantages and
disadvantages of user Testing/ Validation
UNIT 4 PRODUCT INNOVATION 9
Design thinking for strategic innovation , Definition of innovation, art of innovation, teams for
innovation, materials and innovation in materials, definition of product and its classification.
Innovation towards product design Case studies
UNIT 5 DESIGN THINKING IN BUSINESS PROCESSES 9
Design Thinking applied in Business & Strategic Innovation, Design Thinking principles that
redefine business – Business challenges: Growth, Predictability, Change, Maintaining
Relevance, Extreme competition, Standardization. Design thinking to meet corporate needs
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the principles of design thinking and its Understand

approaches
CO2 Apply the principles of empathy, and find the solutions Apply
for human centered design problems
CO3 Apply the knowledge of design ideas to develop different Apply
technique
CO4 Apply the knowledge of idea generation, prototype and Apply

testing in design thinking context
CO5 Apply design thinking techniques for product Analyze
innovation
CO6 Analyze the design thinking in business process in Analyze
various models
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tim Brown, Harper Collins, Change by design, Tata McGraw-Hill India, 6th edition, 2019.
2. George E Dieter, Engineering design , TataMcGraw-Hill,4th edition,2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Harris Jerome, Human- Centered Design, Jaico Publishers, 2018

2. IdrisMootee Design Thinking for Strategic Innovation, John Wiley & Sons, 7th edition 2013.
Course Designer: M.Fathu Nisha, ASP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
PS
POs
Os
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO1 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
CAM
2.6 2 - 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.6 2 2.3 0.6
(Avg)

L T P C
21UEC972 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals of Internet of things
 To impart knowledge on various automation and monitoring applications
in Internet of things
 To introduce the concept of various soft wares used inIoT
Unit – 1 IoT FUNDAMENTALS &BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Introduction-Evolution of IoT Concept-IoT Vision & Definition-IoT Basic Characteristics- IoT Distinction &
General Enablers -IoT Architectures: Three, Five ,Six and Seven Layered
architecture-IoT Building Blocks-The Smart Things, The IoT Gateway,Network
Infrastructure-IoT Cloud-IoT Analytics, IoT and Smart Home
Unit – 2 SENSING PRINCIPLES & APPLICATIONS INIOT 9
Sensor Fundamentals, Sensor Classification, Anatomy of Sensors, WSN-Sensing Domain and
Architecture of IoT Gateway, Selection of Gateway-IoT and Smart Home & Framework-IoT and
Healthcare, IoT and Smart Mobility, Car Parking System-IoT and Agriculture- IoT Architecture of Smart
Agriculture-Smart Grid, IoT-based Smart Cities, IoT and Smart Education, Industrial IoT
Unit – 3 IOT AUTOMATION 9

The need for new technology, From DCS to SCADA-Automation System Architectures, Current trends
in automation systems-Next Generation automation and digitisation
technology-The Local Cloud Concept-Local cloud establishment-Automation support- Automation
application engineering in local clouds-Latency and security in clouds
Unit – 4 IOT PLATFORMS AND TOOLS 9
Packet Tracer Programming Environment- Visual Programming Language -Hello World
Program, Simple Smart Light Project-Open source IoT Platforms and Tools
Unit – 5 APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Agricultural IoT-Vehicular IoT-Healthcare IoT-Evolution of New IoT Paradigms-

Challenges Associated with IoT-Emerging Pillars of IoT
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamental concepts of Internet of Things.
CO1 Understand
Apply the knowledge of architectural IoT and sensing principles concept to build Apply
CO2
the blocks in various applications of IoT
Apply the knowledge of IoT concepts and sensors to implement IoT in various
CO3
applications using available open source software Apply
Tools
Design the basic electronic devices used in IoT using CISCO Packet Tracer Apply
CO4
CO5 Analyze the different automotive applications in IoT Analyze
Analyze various state of the art IoT based automation systems for
CO6 Analyze
different case studies
Text Book
1. Muhammad Azhar Iqbal, Sajjad Hussain, Huanlai Xing,Muhammad AliImran,‖Enabling
The Internet of Things‖,IEEE Press, John Wiley & ,2021.
2. Jerker Delsing,‖IoT Automation‖,CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,2017.
3. Sudip Misra,Anandrup Mukherjee, ArjitRoy,‖Introduction to IoT‖,Cambridge University
Press,2020
21UEC973 SENSORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
REFERENCES:
OBJECTIVES:
1. ● Daniel Minoli,―Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving
Describe the operation of various sensors and actuators.
World of M2M Communications‖,ISBN:978-1-118-47347- 4,WileyPublications
● Select an appropriate sensor and actuator for sensing and control action
2. Bernd Scholz-Reiter,Florian Michahelles,―Architecting the Internet of Things‖,
respectively.
ISBN978-3- 642-19156-5 e-ISBN978-3-642-19157-2,Springer
● Differentiate between smart sensor and conventional sensor.
3. Hakima Chaouchi,―The Internet of Things Connecting Objects to the
● Compare analog and digital transducers with actuators.
Web‖ISBN:978-1- 84821-140-7,WileyPublications
● Discuss the latest technology in sensor development
Web Resources:
UNIT I Introduction
https://www.netacad.com/courses/packet- 9
tracer https://www.tinkercad.com/
Principles of operation Sensors and transducers, classification, characteristics. Recent trends in
sensor technology: Fibre Optic Sensors, Film Sensors, Semiconductor IC Technology,
Microelectromechanical System (MEMS), Nano Sensors.
Course Designer : Mrs.R.Devika AP/ECE

UNIT II Transducers 9
Electrostatic and Piezoelectric Transducers, Quartz Resonators and Ultrasonic Sensors, Hall effect
and Inductance and Eddy current sensors. Angular/Rotary
CO/PO/PSO MAPPINGmovement Transducer, Electromagnetic
Flowmeter. Acoustic Temp Sensor, Nuclear Thermometer, Magnetic Thermometer, Resistance
Change Type, Thermoelectric. POs PSOs
UNIT III Electroanalytical Sensors 9
CO
Introduction, Electro-chemical Cell, Cell potential, Sd. Hydrogen Electrode (SHE), Liquid Junction
1
1 Polarization,
and Other potentials, 2 3Reference
4 5 6
Electrodes, 7Sensor
8 Electrodes,
9 10Radiation
11 Sensors:I II
2
Basic Characteristics, Photo-emissive Cell and Photomultiplier,
Photovoltaic
CO.1 Cell,2X-ray and Nuclear Radiation Sensors. 2 2 2
UNIT IV Digital Transducers 9
CO.2 2 2 2 2
Digital Encoder, Shaft Encoder, Switches: Pressure, Level, Flow, Temperature, Proximity Switches,
Limit Switches and its types, Isolators (or Barriers).Application of Sensors, Automotive Sensors,
Home
CO.3Appliance 3Sensors, Aerospace Sensors, Sensors for manufacturing, Medical 2 2Diagnostic
2
Sensors, Sensors for Environmental Monitoring Introduction to Intelligent sensor architecture,
Primary
CO.4 Sensors 3Excitation, Amplification, 2 2 2
Fitters, Converters, Compensation, Information Coding/Processing, Data Communication, Smart
Transmitters.
CO.5 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
UNIT V Applications 9
CO.6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
Physical sensors: Measuring Temperature, Sensors in Ultrasound Imaging, Detectors in Radiology, 2
Biomedical Applications of Magnetic Field Sensors.
Biosensors:
CAM Enzymatic Biosensors, Affinity Biosensors, Living Biosensors, Direct Methods for
2.5 Compounds.
Monitoring Bioactive 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(Avg)
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the principle of operation of different sensors and
CO1 actuators. Understand
CO2 Design a real time sensor using any simulation software Apply
Apply the concept of operation of various actuators in various Apply
CO3 applications.
CO4 Analyze transducers for measurement of pressure and force. Analyze
Analyze and select proper sensor electrodes for electrochemical Analyze

CO5 application.
Analyze a smart sensor using conventional sensors and Analyze
CO6 microcontrollers for specified application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, 2/E, PHI Learning, 2003
2. A.K.Shawhney, ,Electrical & Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation, Dhanpat
Rai & Sons, 2015
3. H. S. Kalsi ,Electronics instrumentation,[TMH], 2012
REFERENCES:
1. CD Johnson, Process control Instrumentation Technology, PHI Learning, 2010
Course Designer: Mrs.M.Brindha AP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO5 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO6 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CAM 2.5 2.4 2.4 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
3 -Strong 2- Medium 1 - Weak

L T P C
21UEC974 FUNDAMENTALS OF VLSI
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To present the Digital fundamentals, Boolean algebra and its applications.
● To familiarize with the design of various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
● Study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics.
UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9
Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‘s and 2‘s complements, Boolean
theorems, Logic gates, Universal gates, Sum of products and product of sums.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS: Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel
Adder –BCD Adder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer.
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS: Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, Master/Slave FF – operation, Ring Counters.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9

MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate, Layout Design Rules, Stick
Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters tics, C-V Charters tics, DC Transfer characteristics.
UNIT IV COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode
Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates.
UNIT V SEQUENTIAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9
SEQUENTIAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS Static latches and Registers, Dynamic latches and Registers,
Pulse Registers, Sense Amplifier Based Register, Pipelining, Schmitt Trigger.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basic knowledge of digital electronics. Understand
Apply the concepts of Boolean function to design combinational
CO2 Apply
circuits.
CO3 Design transmission gate using MOS Transistor. Apply
CO4 Design various Sequential circuits using CMOS Transistor Apply
CO5 Analyze different MoS Logic circuits using Pass transistor. Analyze
Analyze the performance of combination and sequential circuits using

CO6 Analyze
various design methodologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th
Edition, Pearson , 2017
2. Jan M. Rabaey ,Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, ”Digital Integrated Circuits:A Design
perspective”, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2014.
3. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2011
4. M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997.
5. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:Analysis &
Design”,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
Course Designer: Mr.S.Janarthanan, AP / ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO PO 1 PO2 PO 3 PO4 PO 5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2
CO6 3 3 2 2 2
2.
CAM 3 2 2 2
8
21UEC975 WEARABLE DEVICES L T P C
3 0 0 3
● To know the sensor and signal processing requirement of wearable systems
● To understand the communication and security aspects
● To know the level of energy involvement in wearable systems
UNIT I Sensors 9
Need for wearable systems, Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement sensors,
Respiration activity sensor, Inductive plethysmography, Impedance plethysmography,
pneumography, Wearable ground reaction force sensor, GSR, Radiant thermal sensor,
Wearable motion sensors, CMOS –Based Biosensors, E-Textiles, Bio
compatibility
UNIT II Signal Processing 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, Constraint on sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption,
light weight signal processing, Rejection of irrelevant information, Data mining.
UNIT III Energy Harvesting for Wearable Devices 9

Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human body as a heat source for power generation,
Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests, Thermopiles.
UNIT IV Wireless Health System 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare,
Technical Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction,
Wireless communication techniques.
UNIT V Applications of Wearable Systems 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, Multi parameter monitoring, Neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine, Smart
Fabrics
TOTAL : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this
CO1 course in the present contemporary world Understand
Choose appropriate sensors and signal processing Apply

CO2 techniques for wearable systems
Assess the energy requirement for a wearable system and Apply
CO3 analyze and experiment energy harvesting techniques for
wearable systems
Appreciate the need for BAN and the challenges involved in the Apply
CO4 design of BAN
Analyze sensors and wearable devices of health monitoring Analyze
CO5 systems
Design basic wearable systems for medical applications Analyze
CO6 using simulation tools.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Annalisa Bonfiglio, Danilo De Rossi, "Wearable Monitoring Systems", Springer,2011.
2. Sandeep K.S. Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee, Krishna Kumar Venkata subramanian, "Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability," Cambridge University
Press,2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Hang,Yuan-Ting, "Wearable medical sensors andsystems",Springer-2013.
2. Mehmet R. Yuce, Jamil Y. Khan, "Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation and Applications", Pan Stanford Publishing Pvt. Ltd,
Singapore,2012.
3. Guang-Zhong Yang(Ed.), "Body Sensor Networks, "Springer,2006.
4. Andreas Lymberis, Danilo de Rossi ,'Wearable eHealth systems for Personalized
Health Management - State of the art and future challenges ' IOS press, The
Netherlands,2004.
Course Designer: K.A.Shahul Hameed, Prof/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 2 3 2
2.
CAM 2.8 2.6 2 2
3
21UEC976 L T P C
PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce basics of Communication system
● To impart knowledge on Analog and Digital modulation techniques
● To preface about the wave propagation
● To describe about the applications of Communication systems
UNIT I Introduction 9
Review on Communication- Elements of an Electrical Communication System- Digital
Communication System –Early work in Digital Communication- Communication Channels and
their characteristics
UNIT II Analog Modulation 9
Amplitude Modulation- Virtues and Limitations of Amplitude modulation- Angle Modulation
– Frequency Modulation – Narrowband frequency modulation – wideband Frequency
modulation – Transmission bandwidth of FM signals - Phase Modulation
UNIT III Digital Modulation 9

Amplitude Shift keying – Frequency Shift keying- Phase shift keying – QPSK- PCM -
Sampling
UNIT IV Wave Propagation 9

Concept of propagation of radio waves- Ground wave Propagation- Sky wave : Ionospheric layers,
– multipath space wave propagation - Duct propagation(microwave space-wave propagation)-
Troposphere scatter propagation
UNIT V Applications of Communication Systems 9

Satellite, RADAR, Optical, Mobile and Computer Communication(Block diagram approach only)
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Describe the evaluation of the communication systems and its
CO1 fundamental concepts Understand
Describe the principles of amplitude modulated and angle Apply

CO2 modulated communication systems and be able to analyze their
performance.
Describe the principles of various digital modulation systems and Apply
CO3 their properties
Apply the knowledge of wave propagation to determine the radiation Apply

CO4 characteristics
Determine the communication channels types with their

CO5 characteristics Analyze
CO6 Design antennas for given specification using modern tools Create
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Communication Systems, Second edition, John.G.Proakis and
Masoud Salchi (Pearson) 2014.
2. CommunicationSystems , John Wiley & Sons, INC. 4th Edition 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. An Introduction to Analog and digital Communications, 2nd Edition, Simon Haykin 2010
2. Fundamentals of Analogue and Digital Communication systems- Sunil Bhooshan –
Springer, 2022
Course Designer :Dr.G.Krishnaveni,ASP/ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
POs PSOs
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I II
CO.1 2 2
CO.2 3 3 2 2
CO.3 3 3 2 2
CO.4 3 3 2 2 2
CO.5 3 3 3 3 2
CO.6 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CAM
(Avg) 2.83 3 2.4 3 3 2 2

L T P C
21UEC977 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
● To understand Automotive Electronic Engine Control in today‘s automotive industry.
● To analyze various automotive sensors and actuators while interfacing with
processors during automotive system design.
● To understand the future Automotive Electronic Systems.
Unit 1 Automotive Fundamentals 9
Evolution of Automotive Electronics, Automobile Physical Configuration, Survey of Major Automotive

Systems, The Engine – Engine Block, Cylinder Head, Four Stroke Cycle, Engine Control, Ignition
System, Spark plug, High voltage circuit and distribution, Spark pulse generation, Ignition Timing,
Diesel Engine- Drive Train, Transmission, Drive Shaft, Differential, Suspension, Brakes, Steering
System
9
Unit 2 Electronic Engine Control
Motivation for Electronic Engine Control- Exhaust Emissions- Fuel Economy- Federal Government
Test Procedures- Concept of an Electronic Engine Control System- Definition of Engine
Performance Terms- Exhaust Catalytic Converters- Electronic Fuel-Control System- Analysis of
Intake Manifold Pressure- Idle Speed Control- Electronic Ignition
Unit 3 Sensors and Actuators 9
Sensors : Basics and Overview –- Overview of the physical effects for sensors- Overview and
selection of sensor technologies- Airflow rate sensor- Strain Gauge MAP sensor-Engine Crankshaft
Angular Position Sensor,-Magnetic Reluctance Position Sensor-Optical Crankshaft Position
Sensor,-Throttle Angle Sensor (TAS), Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor-Exhaust Gas
Oxygen (O2/EGO) Lambda Sensors, Piezoelectric Knock Sensor.
Actuators: Automotive Engine Control Actuators- Electromechanical actuators - Fluid- mechanical

actuators -Electric Motor Actuators - Ignition System
Unit 4 9
Automotive Networking & Control System
Automotive Networking: Bus Systems – Classification, Applications in the vehicle, Coupling of
networks, Examples of networked vehicles, Buses - CAN Bus, LIN Bus, MOST Bus, Bluetooth, Flex
Ray, Diagnostic Interfaces.
Vehicle Motion control : Typical Cruise Control System, Digital Cruise Control System, Digital Speed
Sensor, Throttle Actuator, Digital Cruise Control configuration, Cruise Control Electronics (Digital
only), Antilock Brake System (ABS), Electronic Suspension System
Unit 5 Future Automotive Electronic System 9
Alternative Fuel Engines, Electric and Hybrid vehicles, Fuel cell powered cars, Collision Avoidance
Radar warning Systems, Low tire pressure warning system, Heads Up display, Speech Synthesis,
navigation – Navigation Sensors - Radio Navigation, Signpost navigation, dead reckoning navigation,
Voice Recognition Cell Phone dialing, Advanced Cruise Control, Stability Augmentation, Automatic
driving Control
TOTAL: 45 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic automotive components, subsystems,
CO1 and basics of Electronic Engine Control in today‘s automotive Understand
industry
Design and implement the electronics that attribute the reliability,
safety, and smartness to the automobiles, providing add-on
CO2 Apply
comforts and get fair idea on future Automotive
Electronic Systems
Design a circuit by using the concept of various sensors and
CO3 Apply
networking
CO4 Apply knowledge of modern technologies in automotive design Apply
Analyze various automotive sensors and actuators while
CO5 interfacing with microcontrollers and microprocessors during Analyze
automotive system design.
Analyze the various techniques to control the systems
CO6 Analyze
automatically
Text Books:
1. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 6th Edition, Elsevier
Publishing,2003
2. Robert Bosch Gmbh (Ed.) Bosch “Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics
Systems and Components, Networking and Hybrid Drive”, 5th edition, John Wiley& Sons
Inc., 2007.
Reference Books:
1. NajamuzZaman , “ Automotive Electronics Design Fundamental’’ first edition,
Springer 2015.
2. Allan Bonnick , “Automotive Computer Controlled Systems” : Diagnostic tools and
techniques ,1st edition. 2001
Course Designer :Mr.N.Sathiyanathan, AP / ECE
CO/PO/PSO MAPPING
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO6 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CAM 2.5 2.4 2.2 - - - - - - - - - 2
3 -Strong 2- Medium 1 - Weak

COURSES OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS
S. Course Code Course Name Department L T P C

No.
1. 21UEC225 Principles of Electronics Engineering CSBS 3 0 0 3
2. 21UEC226 Electronics Engineering Laboratory CSBS 0 0 2 1
3. 21UEC425 Microprocessors And Microcontrollers CSE 0 0 3

3
Microprocessors And
4. 21UEC426 Microcontrollers Laboratory CSE 0 0 2 1
21UEC225 PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To explain the operation of semiconductor diodes and their characteristics.

● To enable the student to understand the construction ,operation and charactristics BJT,FET
and MOSFET.
● To enable the students to understand the fundamentals of digital circuits.
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTORS 9Hrs
Conductors, Semiconductors & Insulators: electrical properties, band diagrams. Semiconductors:

intrinsic & extrinsic, energy band diagram, P&N-type semiconductors, drift & diffusion carriers. Diodes
and Diode Circuits: Formation of P-N junction, forward and reverse biased P-N junction, V-I
characteristics, Zener breakdown, Avalanche breakdown and its reverse characteristics, Rectifier
circuits: half wave, full wave, PIV, DC voltage and current, ripple factor, efficiency.
UNIT II BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS 9Hrs
Formation of PNP / NPN junctions; transistor mechanism and principle of transistors, CE, CB, CC
configuration, transistor characteristics: cut-off active and saturation mode, transistor action, injection
efficiency, current amplification factors for CB and CE modes
UNIT III FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS 9Hrs
Concept of Field Effect Transistors (channel width modulation), Gate isolation types, JFET Structure
and characteristics, MOSFET Structure and characteristics, depletion and enhancement type; CS,
CG, CD configurations; CMOS: Basic Principles.
UNIT IV DIGITAL COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9Hrs
Number systems, Boolean algebra, Basic and Universal Gates, Half adder – Full Adder – Half
subtractor – Full subtractor - Parallel binary adder, parallel binary Subtractor – Fast Adder - Carry
Look Ahead adder , Multiplexer/Demultiplexer, code converters.
UNIT V DIGITAL SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9Hrs
Latches, Flip-flops: SR, JK, D, T, and Master-Slave, Asynchronous Ripple or serial counter,
Asynchronous Up/Down counter, Synchronous counters, Synchronous Up/Down counters, shift
registers and its types.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 Describe the fundamental concept of various electronic Devices. (Understand)
CO 2 Describe the functions of the various building blocks of digital circuits.(Understand)
CO 3 Apply the concepts of semiconductor devices to design electronic circuits.(Apply)
CO 4 Apply the knowledge of logic gates to design digital circuits.(Apply)
CO 5 Analyze different logics to identify suitable logic circuits for various applications.(Analyze)
CO 6 Analyze the various parameters of diodes and transistors for suitable application.(Analyze)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Salivahanan S., Suresh kumar N. and Vallavanraj A., “Electronic Devices and
Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill., 4th Edition, 2017.
2. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic & Computer Design,. Pearson Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Robert T. Paynter, “Introducing Electronics Devices and Circuits”, Pearson Education,

Seventh Edition, 2010.
2. Millman J. &Halkins and Satyebranta Jit, “Electronic Devices &Circuits”, Tata Mc- Graw
Hill, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Mandal, “Digital Electronics Principles & Application, McGraw Hill Edu, 2013.
4. D.P.Kothari,J.S.Dhillon, „Digital circuits and Design‟,Pearson Education, 2016
L T P C
21UEC226 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
LABORATORY 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVE
● To enable the students to identify the components and operation of semiconductor diodes and
their characteristics.
● To enable the students to design digital logic circuits.
● To make the students to identify component for suitable applications.
1. Characteristics of PN Junction diode
2. Characteristics of Zener diode
3. Half wave rectifier with capacitive filter.
4. Full wave rectifier with capacitive filter.
5. Characteristics of CB and CE Configuration.
6. Drain and transfer characteristics of JFET.
7. Study of logic gates.
8. Design and implementation of Adder and subtractor.
9. Design and implementation of Code Converter.
10. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer.
11. Design and implementation of Shift registers
12. Design and Implementation of Synchronous and Asynchronous counters.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the knowledge of transistors to measure various parameters
CO1 Apply
in different configuration for suitable applications.(K3)
Apply the knowledge of semiconductor diodes to construct
CO2 Apply
Rectifiers.(K3)
CO3 Design Combinational and Sequential Logic circuits.(K3) Apply
Apply appropriate instrumentation tools to make measurements
CO4 Apply
of physical quantities.(K3)
CO5 Use appropriate procedure to conduct experiments and collect Apply
data.(K3)
CO6 Organize
efficiently executing the given task.(A4)
21UEC425 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To develop an in-depth understanding of the operation of microprocessors & Microcontrollers

assembly language programming
● To develop skills in interfacing peripheral devices with microprocessor & Microcontroller.
● To learn about advanced microcontrollers
UNIT I 8086 MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
8086 Microprocessor architecture – Signals – Maximum & Minimum mode Configuration - Addressing
modes - Instruction set and assembler directives – Assembly Language Programming –Procedures –
Macros – Interrupts and interrupt service routines
UNIT II PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 9
Memory interfacing and I/O interfacing - Serial Communication Interface (8251)- parallel port Interface
(8255) - Keyboard and Display controller (8279) – Programmable Interval Timer(8253/8254) –
Programmable Interrupt Controller(8259) - DMA Controller(8237).
UNIT III 8051 MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
8051 Architecture– Memory organization - Special Function Registers (SFRs) - I/O Pins / Ports –
Instruction sets and Addressing modes - 8051 Modes and Programming – Timer, Interrupts, Serial
ports- Assembly Language Programming
UNIT IV 8051 INTERFACING AND APPLICATIONS 9
8051 Interfacing: LCD & Keyboard interfacing - ADC, DAC & Sensor interfacing, External Memory
Interfacing - Stepper Motor and Wave form generation-Traffic light controller.
UNIT V ADVANCE MICROCONTROLLER 9
Arduino – Features – Architecture and Applications, PIC - Features – Architecture and Applications.
TOTAL : 45 Periods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
Describe the architecture and operation of typical microprocessors

CO1 Understand
and microcontrollers.
CO2 Apply
Apply knowledge of addressing modes and instructions set to
demonstrate programming ability.
CO3 Apply
Apply the knowledge of interfacing techniques to develop code for
specific problem.
CO4
Develop microprocessor and microcontroller-based applications by
Analyze
analyzing various interfacing techniques.
CO5
Design and develop code for Microcontroller based real time
Create
Applications.
CO6
Develop microprocessor & Microcontroller based programs using
Apply
modern tools
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”,Tata McGraw

Hill,2006.
2. Kenneth J Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application” ,
Penram International Publishers (India), 2nd Edition,1996
3. Mazidi M. A., McKinlay R. D., Causey D “PIC Microcontroller And Embedded Systems”,
Pearson Education International, 2008
REFERENCES:
1. Oppenheim A V,” Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Mitra S K,” Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
3. David J. Defatta, Joseph G. Lucas, William S. Hodgkiss,” Digital signal processing: a system
design approach”, John Wiley, 1995.
4. B.Venkataramani, M.Bhaskar,” Digital Signal Processor, Architecture, Programming and
Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
L T P C
21UEC426 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
● To develop knowledge in assembly language programming with microprocessor
● To give knowledge in various peripheral interfacing with microprocessor
1. Basic Arithmetic and Logical operation using 8086 Microprocessor

2. Code conversion and Matrix operation using 8086 Microprocessor
3. String manipulation using 8086 Microprocessor
4. Searching and Sorting operation using 8086 Microprocessor
5. Basic Arithmetic and Logical Operation using 8051 Microcontroller
6. Square and cube Program, 2‟s compliment of a number using 8051 Microcontroller
7. Interfacing 8086 microprocessor with 8255
8. Interfacing 8086 microprocessor with 8279
9. Interfacing ADC and DAC with 8086 microprocessor.
10. Stepper Motor interfacing with 8051 microcontroller.
11. LCD display interfacing using Arduino.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop assembly language programs to perform arithmetic and
CO1 Apply
logical operations using 8086 and 8051
Develop assembly language programs for various applications using
CO2 Analyze
8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller
Analyze the various interfacing techniques to develop real time
CO3 Apply
applications using 8086 microprocessor and 8051 Microcontroller.
Apply appropriate instrumentation tools to make measurements of
CO4 Apply
physical quantities.
CO5 Use appropriate procedure to conduct experiments and collect data Apply
CO6 Organize

21-25 After CPEC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

21-25 After CPEC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

21-25 After CPEC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SETHU INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

(An Autonomous Institution | Accredited with ‘A++’ Grade by NAAC)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

CURRICULUM & SYLLABUS

OVERALL COURSE STRUCTURE

Total No. Credit

SEMESTER - WISE COURSE STRUCTURE – NUMBER OF

SEMESTER - WISE COURSE STRUCTURE – CREDITS

English for Technical Communication

Problem Solving and Python Programming

Communication Skills for Professionals

3. 21UPH208 Electromagnetic Theory(Only for ECE) BS 3 0 0 3

Basic Electrical and Instrumentation

Electronic Devices (Integrated Course)

Basic Sciences Laboratory – II

7. Environmental Science MC 2 0 0 P/F

Numerical Analysis and Linear

2. 21UEC302 Digital Electronics and Design PC 3 0 0 3

3. 21UEC303 Circuit Theory PC 3 0 0 3

4. 21UEC304 Signals and Systems PC 3 1 0 4

5. 21UEC305 Electronic Circuits PC 3 0 0 3

7. 21UEC306 Digital Electronics Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1

8. 21UEC307 Electronic Circuits Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1

Biology for Engineers

Probability, Statistics and Mathematical

3. 21UEC403 Data Communication and Networks PC 3 0 0 3

Linear Integrated Circuits

5. 21UEC405 Analog and Digital Communication PC 3 0 0 3

Introduction to data structures and

Interpersonal Skills & Team building

9. 21UGM431 Gender Equality MC 1 0 0 P/F

1. 21UEC501 Digital Signal Processing PC 3 1 0 4

Internet of Things and Applications

4. 21UEC504 Antenna and Wave Propagation PC 3 0 0 3

Reasoning and Aptitude (common

Microprocessors, Microcontrollers and

9. 21UEC506 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1

10. 21UEC507 Creative Thinking and Innovation PW 0 0 2 1

11. 21UGT140 Heritage of Tamils MC 1 0 0 1

1. 21UEC601 Wireless Communication PC 3 0 0 3

2. 21UEC602 VLSI Design PC 3 0 0 3

3. 21UEC603 Image Processing and Analysis ES 3 0 0 3

5. PE - III Professional Elective – III PE 3 0 0 3

7. 21UEC607 Product Development Project PW 0 0 8 4

8. 21UEC608 VLSI Design Laboratory PC 0 0 2 1

Soft skills and Communication Laboratory

Indian Constitution (Common to ALL

1. 21UME701 Project Management and Finance HS 3 0 0 3

2. 21UEC702 Optical and Microwave Communication PC 3 0 0 3

5. OE - III Open Elective – III OE 3 0 0 3

7. 21UGM731 Sports and Social Development MC - - - P/F

8. 21UGM732 Skill Development MC - - - P/F

Vertical I – 21ECV100-Signal Processing

1. 21ECV101 Adaptive Signal processing and Applications 3 0 0 3

2. 21ECV102 Speech and Audio Signal Processing 3 0 0 3

3. 21ECV103 Video Processing and Analysis 3 0 0 3

4. 21ECV104 Bio Medical Signal & Image Processing 3 0 0 3

5. 21ECV105 DSP Processor Architecture 3 0 0 3

6. 21ECV106 Software Defined and Cognitive Radio 3 0 0 3

7. 21ECV107 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3